WO2016136936A1 - Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method for color filter, solid state imaging element, image display device and polymer - Google Patents
Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method for color filter, solid state imaging element, image display device and polymer Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2016136936A1 WO2016136936A1 PCT/JP2016/055788 JP2016055788W WO2016136936A1 WO 2016136936 A1 WO2016136936 A1 WO 2016136936A1 JP 2016055788 W JP2016055788 W JP 2016055788W WO 2016136936 A1 WO2016136936 A1 WO 2016136936A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- rtp
- general formula
- anion
- carbon atoms
- Prior art date
Links
- BFIMMTCNYPIMRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cc1cc(C)c(C)c(C)c1 Chemical compound Cc1cc(C)c(C)c(C)c1 BFIMMTCNYPIMRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RCYFRLJALNAEAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cc(cc1)ccc1C(c1ccc(C)c2c1C=CCC2)=C(C=C1)C=CC1=C Chemical compound Cc(cc1)ccc1C(c1ccc(C)c2c1C=CCC2)=C(C=C1)C=CC1=C RCYFRLJALNAEAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B11/00—Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
- C09B11/04—Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
- C09B11/10—Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes
- C09B11/12—Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes without any OH group bound to an aryl nucleus
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
- C09B69/10—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B11/00—Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
- C09B11/04—Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
- C09B11/10—Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes
- C09B11/12—Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes without any OH group bound to an aryl nucleus
- C09B11/20—Preparation from other triarylmethane derivatives, e.g. by substitution, by replacement of substituents
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
- C09B69/02—Dyestuff salts, e.g. salts of acid dyes with basic dyes
- C09B69/06—Dyestuff salts, e.g. salts of acid dyes with basic dyes of cationic dyes with organic acids or with inorganic complex acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
- C09B69/10—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
- C09B69/103—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds containing a diaryl- or triarylmethane dye
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
- G02B5/201—Filters in the form of arrays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
- G02B5/22—Absorbing filters
- G02B5/223—Absorbing filters containing organic substances, e.g. dyes, inks or pigments
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/0005—Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
- G03F7/0007—Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/027—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
- G03F7/032—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
- G03F7/033—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polymers obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. vinyl polymers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/038—Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/038—Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
- G03F7/0388—Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable with ethylenic or acetylenic bands in the side chains of the photopolymer
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/09—Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
- G03F7/105—Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/26—Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a colored composition, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a polymer.
- the coloring composition is used for manufacturing a color filter and the like.
- color filters tend to be used not only for monitors but also for televisions in liquid crystal display device applications.
- color filters are required to have high color characteristics in terms of chromaticity and contrast.
- color filters for image sensors solid-state imaging devices
- Patent Documents 1 and 2 disclose a colored composition containing a compound having a triarylmethane structure.
- a coloring composition used for a color filter or the like is required to be able to form a film having excellent heat resistance and solvent resistance.
- the coloring compositions disclosed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 are not sufficient in heat resistance and solvent resistance.
- an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition, a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a polymer excellent in heat resistance and solvent resistance.
- the polymer includes a repeating unit A having a triarylmethane structure and a repeating unit B having a crosslinkable group, and has a weight average molecular weight of 3000 to
- the inventors have found that the above object can be achieved by using a polymer having a triarylmethane structure having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less and having a triarylmethane structure of 20% by mass or less, and has completed the present invention.
- the present invention provides the following.
- Polymer TP containing at least one repeating unit A having a triarylmethane structure selected from general formula (TP1) and general formula (TP2) and a repeating unit B having a crosslinkable group, and polymerization And a sex compound,
- the polymer TP has a weight average molecular weight of 3000 to 500,000, and the content of the compound A having a triarylmethane structure and a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less is 20% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer TP.
- Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are each Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 71 Rtp 72
- Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- a, b, c and d each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; when a, b, c and d are 2 or more, Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 and Rtp 9 may be linked to each other to form a ring
- X represents an anion, or X is absent and Rtp 1 to R
- the crosslinkable group of the repeating unit B is at least one selected from a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an oxazoline group, a group represented by —C—O—R, and a carbonate group.
- X is at least one anion selected from fluorine anion, chlorine anion, bromine anion, iodine anion, cyanide ion, perchlorate anion, borate anion, PF 6 ⁇ and SbF 6 ⁇ , and ⁇ Selected from SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a compound having at least one structure selected from the structure represented by the following general formula (A1) and the structure represented by the following general formula (A2)
- ⁇ 6> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein X is a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, or a sulfonate anion.
- X is a compound containing a crosslinkable group.
- X is a polymer containing a repeating unit having an anion moiety.
- Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 ⁇ 6
- Rtp 22 each independently represents an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms
- Rtp 71 is represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
- X is either an anion, X is at least one contains an anion of Rtp 21, Rtp 22 and Rtp 71 to absent; repeated either Rtp 21, Rtp 22 and Rtp 71 is It represents the binding site with unit A.
- Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- Rtp 22 each independently represents an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms
- Rtp 71a Represents an alkylene group or an arylene group
- L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
- Rtp 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- X represents an anion, or X does not exist and Rtp At least one of 21 and Rtp 22 contains an anion.
- Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- Rtp 24 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
- Rtp 25 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms
- Rtp 71a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group
- Rtp 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- L 1 represents a single bond or X represents an anion, or X does not exist and at least one of Rtp 21 and Rtp 24 includes an anion.
- the polymer TP contains a repeating unit derived from at least one of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, and (meth) acrylic acid amide, according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12> Coloring composition.
- ⁇ 15> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 14>, comprising a photopolymerization initiator.
- ⁇ 16> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 15>, comprising a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt.
- ⁇ 17> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 16>, which is used for forming a colored layer of a color filter.
- ⁇ 18> A cured film obtained by curing the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 17>.
- ⁇ 19> A color filter having the cured film according to ⁇ 18>.
- ⁇ 20> A step of forming a colored composition layer using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 17>, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and a coloring composition layer And a step of developing and removing the unexposed portion to form a colored pattern.
- ⁇ 21> A step of forming a colored composition layer using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 17> and curing to form a colored layer; and forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer
- a method of manufacturing a color filter comprising: a step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern; and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
- a solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to ⁇ 19>.
- An image display device having the color filter according to ⁇ 19>.
- a polymer comprising a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (TP-7), wherein the polymer has a weight average molecular weight of 3000 to 500,000 and a compound having a triarylmethane structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less.
- each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 1a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group.
- L 11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
- L 12 and L 13 represent a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
- R 2 represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
- R 3 represents a crosslinkable group
- X represents a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion or a sulfonate anion
- a to d are mass ratios of repeating units, a and d each represent a number exceeding 0, and b and c each independently represent a number of 0 or more.
- a colored composition a cured film, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a polymer excellent in heat resistance and solvent resistance.
- the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
- the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent.
- the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
- the “radiation” in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like.
- light means actinic rays or radiation.
- exposure in this specification refers not only to exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. This drawing is also included in the exposure.
- (meth) acrylate represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate
- (meth) acryl represents both and / or acrylic and “(meth) acrylic”.
- Acryloyl represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
- the monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less.
- the polymerizable compound refers to a compound having a polymerizable functional group.
- the polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
- Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group
- Et represents an ethyl group
- Pr represents a propyl group
- Bu represents a butyl group
- Ph represents a phenyl group.
- the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
- the weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight in the present invention are defined as polystyrene conversion values in gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement unless otherwise specified.
- the colored composition of the present invention includes a repeating unit A having a triarylmethane structure, which will be described later, and a polymer TP containing a repeating unit B having a crosslinkable group, and a polymerizable compound.
- the content of Compound A having a molecular weight of 3000 to 500,000 and having a triarylmethane structure and a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less is 20% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer TP.
- the coloring composition excellent in heat resistance and solvent resistance can be provided.
- a film having a good voltage holding ratio can be formed.
- the polymer TP includes a repeating unit A having a triarylmethane structure.
- the repeating unit A preferably has a structure represented by the following general formula (A).
- the repeating unit A is preferably contained at 1 to 99% by mass in all the repeating units of the polymer TP.
- the upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less, and still more preferably 90% by mass or less.
- the lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more. If content of the repeating unit A is the said range, color value will become more favorable.
- X 1 represents a main chain of repeating units.
- L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- DyeI represents a triarylmethane structure represented by general formula (TP1) or general formula (TP2) described later.
- X 1 represents a main chain of repeating units, usually represents a linking group formed by polymerization reaction, for example, having a (meth) acrylic group, styrene group, a vinyl group, an ether group A main chain derived from a compound is preferred. An embodiment having a main chain cyclic alkylene group is also preferred. In addition, it has couple
- X 1 is not particularly limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer, but is particularly preferably a linking group represented by the following (XX-1) to (XX-24), (XX— 1) (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-2), styrene linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17), (XX-18) and (XX-19) ) And a vinyl-based linking chain represented by (XX-24), and (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-1) and (XX-2), ( More preferably selected from styrene-based linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17) and vinyl-based linking chains represented by (XX-24), and (XX-1) and (XXX- (Meth) acrylic connecting chain represented by 2) and (XX-11) In styrene linking chain represented are especially preferred.
- L 1 represents a divalent linking group
- an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —COO —, —OCO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred.
- R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
- the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
- the upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, and still more preferably 20 or less.
- the lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more.
- the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12.
- L 1 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, —NH—, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO— or a linking group in which two or more thereof are combined, and includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, and , —O—, —COO—, and a divalent group formed by combining one or more selected from —OCO— are more preferable, and an alkylene group or alkylene groups are —O—, —COO—, and —OCO.
- the number of atoms constituting the chain connecting X 1 and Dye I is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, further preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 20 or less, for example.
- a low-molecular triarylmethane compound that is unreacted or insufficiently reacted can be effectively suppressed.
- the number of atoms constituting the chain connecting X 1 and Dye I is ten.
- the numbers written in the structural formula are the number of atoms constituting the chain connecting X 1 and DyeI.
- L 1 represents a single bond
- X 1 is bonded to any one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 in the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), and Rtp 71 or Rtp 72 It is preferable that it is couple
- L 1 represents a divalent linking group
- L 1 is bonded to any one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 in the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), and Rtp 71 or Rtp 72 is preferably bonded.
- the repeating unit A has a triarylmethane structure selected from the general formula (TP1) and the general formula (TP2).
- Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are each Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 71 Rtp 72
- Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- a, b, c and d each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; when a, b, c
- Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. It is preferable that one of Rtp 1 and Rtp 2 is an alkyl group and the other is an aryl group. It is preferable that one of Rtp 3 and Rtp 4 is an alkyl group and the other is an aryl group.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
- the alkyl group is preferably unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
- Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , preferably a hydrogen atom or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , and more preferably NRtp 71 Rtp 72 .
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms.
- Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic.
- the alkyl group may be substituted. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
- Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 and Rtp 8 each independently represent a substituent.
- substituents include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
- a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, or a sulfo group is preferable, and a linear chain having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
- a branched alkyl group, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or a carboxy group is more preferable.
- Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 are preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
- Rtp 8 preferably has two alkenyl groups bonded to each other to form a ring.
- the ring is preferably a benzene ring.
- a, b and c each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a and b preferably represent 0 or 1, more preferably 0. c preferably represents 0-2.
- Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and are synonymous with Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 in general formula (TP1), and the preferred ranges are also the same. It is.
- Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 each independently represent a substituent, and are synonymous with Rtp 5 and Rtp 6 in general formula (TP1), and their preferred ranges are also the same.
- Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 each independently represent a substituent, and the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later can be used.
- Rtp 9 is preferably an aryl group, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group.
- Rtp 11 is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
- Rtp 10 represents a substituent, and the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later can be used.
- Rtp 10 is more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group.
- a, b and d each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a and b preferably represent 0 or 1, more preferably 0. d preferably represents 0 to 2, more preferably 0.
- any one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 represents a binding site to the repeating unit, and in particular, Rtp 71 or Rtp 72 is bonded to the repeating unit. A site is preferred.
- Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 may contain an anion.
- anion —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion are preferable, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anion and tris (sulfonyl) methide anion And tetraarylborate anions are more preferable, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anions and tris (sulfonyl) methide anions are more preferable.
- L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking group preferably represents —NR 10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom, an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or a combination thereof.
- a group consisting of a combination of —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom a group consisting of a combination of —O— and an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or —NR 10 — and —SO A group consisting of a combination of 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferred.
- R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and still more preferably 1 to 3.
- These alkylene groups are more preferably perfluoroalkylene groups.
- Specific examples of the fluorine-substituted alkylene group include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the arylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
- Specific examples of the arylene group containing a fluorine atom include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group, and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
- X 1 represents an anion, —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a group containing a structure represented by the following general formula (A1), and the following general formula (A2) It is preferable to be selected from at least one selected from a group containing a structure represented by:
- General formula (A1) In general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
- R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
- R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.
- the number of carbon atoms in the fluorine-substituted alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, still more preferably 1 to 3, still more preferably 1 or 2, and particularly preferably 1.
- These alkyl groups are more preferably perfluoroalkyl groups.
- a trifluoromethyl group is preferable.
- the group containing the structure represented by the general formula (A2) preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group at least at any terminal of R 3 to R 5 in the general formula (A2), and R 3 to R 5 More preferably, at least one of the above is directly bonded to the fluorine-substituted alkyl group.
- at least two ends of R 3 ⁇ R 5, preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group, and more preferably at least two of R 3 ⁇ R 5 are attached directly to a fluorine-substituted alkyl group.
- a fluorine-substituted alkyl group is synonymous with what was demonstrated by group containing the structure represented by general formula (A1), and its preferable range is also the same.
- Other specific examples of X 1 include counter anion A described later. In this case, any one hydrogen atom or halogen atom constituting the counter anion A is bonded to L in the general formula (P).
- the portion substituted with the general formula (P) may be present only at one place, or may be present at two or more places.
- the polymer TP has a number of cations corresponding to the number of anions in addition to the cations contained in the triarylmethane structure. Is preferred.
- X represents an anion.
- X may or may not exist.
- X when X is present, it means that the anion is outside the molecule of the triarylmethane structure.
- the term “an anion outside the molecule of the triarylmethane structure” means that the triarylmethane structure and the anion are not bonded via a covalent bond but exist as a separate compound.
- an anion outside the molecule of the triarylmethane structure is also referred to as a counter anion.
- Examples of the counter anion include fluorine anion, chlorine anion, bromine anion, iodine anion, cyanide ion, perchlorate anion, borate anion (BF 4 ⁇ etc.), PF 6 ⁇ and SbF 6 ⁇ .
- the borate anion is a group represented by B (R 10 ) 4 ⁇ , and R 10 is exemplified by a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a fluorinated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and the like.
- the counter anion may be a compound having an anion portion. That is, the anion part may be included as part of the structure of the compound. In the case where the anion portion is included as a part of the structure of the compound, even if it is included in a part of the polymer having a repeating unit (polymer), it is included in a so-called low molecular compound having a molecular weight of 2000 or less. Also good. In the case of a low molecular weight compound, an embodiment in which at least one of an alkyl group, an aryl group and a crosslinkable group is included together with the anion portion is exemplified. In the present invention, an embodiment in which the counter anion is a compound containing a crosslinkable group and an embodiment in which the counter anion is a polymer containing a repeating unit having an anion moiety are preferred.
- the counter anion is a compound having an anion moiety
- the anion moiety is represented by —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 3 ⁇ , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1), and the following general formula (A2). At least one selected from the structures represented is preferred.
- the general formula (A1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (A1-1).
- Formula (A1-1) (In General Formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent —SO 2 — or —CO—, and X 1 and X 2 each independently represent an alkylene group or an arylene group. )
- R 1 and R 2 of the general formula (A1) in the same meaning as R 1 and R 2, and preferred ranges are also the same.
- X 1 represents an alkylene group
- the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- X 1 represents an arylene group
- the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6.
- X 1 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
- X 2 represents an alkylene group or an arylene group, and an alkylene group is preferable.
- the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1.
- X 2 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
- R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
- R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.
- Preferably representing the at least two R 3 ⁇ R 5 is -SO 2 - - In formula (A2), at least one of R 3 ⁇ R 5 -SO 2 more preferably represents.
- the counter anion is a compound having an anion moiety
- R—SO 3 ⁇ , R—COO — or R—PO 4 — wherein R is substituted with a halogen atom or a halogen atom.
- alkyl group which may be substituted and an aryl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom are also exemplified.
- Specific examples of the compound containing the group represented by the general formula (A1) include R 1 as a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and an aryl which may be substituted with a halogen atom. Examples are compounds bonded to a group.
- R 4 and R 5 are each substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, or a halogen atom.
- a halogen atom an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, or a halogen atom.
- the case where it is the aryl group which may be made is illustrated.
- the counter anion is a compound having an anion moiety
- the counter anion is preferably a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a compound containing a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, or a compound containing a sulfonate anion.
- the compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion may be a monomer or a polymer.
- the compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion is preferably represented by the following general formula (AN1).
- General formula (AN1) In general formula (AN1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 6, and more preferably 1 to 3.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent. In particular, a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group is preferably an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
- R 2 has the same meaning as R 1 , and the preferred range is also the same.
- a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide anion is preferable. By setting it as such a structure, heat resistance can be improved more.
- the compound containing a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (AN2).
- General formula (AN2) In general formula (AN2), R 3 to R 5 each independently represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 6, and more preferably 1 to 3.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent.
- a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group is preferably an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
- R 4 has the same meaning as R 3 , and the preferred range is also the same.
- R 5 has the same meaning as R 3 , and the preferred range is also the same.
- a tris (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) methide anion is preferable.
- the compound containing a sulfonate anion is preferably represented by the following general formula (AN3).
- R represents an alkyl group an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable.
- R represents an aryl group an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
- a trifluoromethanesulfonate anion is preferable.
- counter anion A Specific examples of other counter anions include the following, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In this specification, the following other specific examples of the counter anion are referred to as “counter anion A”.
- the counter anion is a compound containing a crosslinkable group
- the crosslinkable group include known polymerizable groups that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat. Specifically, a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group, a vinyl group, a cyclic ether group, and a group represented by —C—O—R (where R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms).
- At least one selected from a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group, a vinyl group and a cyclic ether group is preferable, and one selected from a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group and a vinyl group is more preferable
- a (meth) acryloyl group or a styryl group is more preferable.
- the number of crosslinkable groups in the compound containing a crosslinkable group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
- crosslinkable group and the counter anion may be directly bonded or may be bonded via a linking group, but are preferably bonded via a linking group.
- a specific example in the case of a compound containing a counter anion crosslinkable group is preferably represented by the following general formula (B).
- P represents a crosslinkable group.
- L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- Anion represents the counter anion.
- P represents a crosslinkable group, and examples thereof include the crosslinkable groups described above.
- L represents a divalent linking group
- an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O— , —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO 2 — and a combination of two or more thereof are preferred.
- R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
- the linking group is preferably a linking group in which two or more alkylene groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, arylene groups having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —NH—, —CO—, —O— and —SO 2 — are combined.
- a compound containing a counter anion crosslinkable group it may have a functional group other than the crosslinkable group.
- other functional groups include acid groups.
- the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
- the counter anion further has an acid group, the number of acid groups in the compound is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
- the molecular weight of the compound containing a crosslinkable group is preferably 200 to 2000, and more preferably 200 to 500.
- the anion multimer may have an anion part in the side chain of the repeating unit, an anion part in the main chain of the repeating unit, or an anion part in both the main chain and the side chain. You may do it.
- the anion multimer is preferably represented by the following general formula (C) and / or the following general formula (D).
- X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit.
- L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- Anion represents the anion moiety.
- X 1 represents a main chain of repeating units, usually represents a linking group formed by polymerization reaction, for example, (meth) acrylic, styrene, vinyl and the like are preferable.
- Two sites represented by * are repeating units.
- L 1 represents a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, — COO—, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OCO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred.
- R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
- L 1 is a single bond or a combination of 2 or more of an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —NH—, —CO 2 —, —O—, and —SO 2 —.
- a valent linking group is more preferred.
- the anion multimer is preferably represented by the following general formula (AN4).
- General formula (AN4) In the general formula (AN4), X 1 represents a main chain of repeating units. L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. X 1 and L 1 have the same meanings as X 1 and L 1 in the above the general formula (C), and preferred ranges are also the same. R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 6, and more preferably 1 to 3.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent. In particular, a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group is preferably an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
- Formula (D) (In General Formula (D), L 2 and L 3 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents an anion moiety.)
- L 2 and L 3 represent a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH— , —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OCO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred.
- R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
- L 2 is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group).
- the arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
- L 3 is preferably a group composed of a combination of an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group) and —O—, and at least one arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom. It is preferable.
- the anionic multimer may contain a repeating unit having a polymerizable group.
- the amount thereof is preferably, for example, 10 to 50 mol, and more preferably 10 to 30 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units.
- the anionic multimer may contain a repeating unit having an acid group.
- the amount thereof is, for example, preferably 10 to 50 mol, more preferably 10 to 30 mol, relative to 100 mol of all repeating units.
- the weight average molecular weight of the anionic multimer is preferably 1,000 to 30,000, more preferably 3,000 to 20,000.
- a chain transfer agent When forming an anionic multimer, a chain transfer agent may be added.
- the chain transfer agent is preferably an alkyl mercaptan, preferably an alkyl mercaptan having 4 or more carbon atoms, an alkyl mercaptan substituted with a carboxy group, an ether group or an ester group.
- the halogen ion content contained in the anionic multimer is preferably 10 to 3000 ppm, more preferably 10 to 2000 ppm, and even more preferably 10 to 1000 ppm. Specific examples of the anion multimer include the structures described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0035 of JP-A-2015-030742, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the cation is present in a delocalized manner as follows, and the following structure Are synonymous and both are included in the present invention.
- the triarylmethane structure is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP3).
- Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- Rtp 22 each independently represents an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms
- Rtp 71 represents an alkyl group. represents a group or an aryl group
- X is either an anion, X is at least one contains an anion of Rtp 21, Rtp 22 and Rtp 71 to absent; repeated either Rtp 21, Rtp 22 and Rtp 71 is a unit
- the binding site to A is represented.
- Rtp 21 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later. By setting it as such a structure, light resistance can be improved more.
- Rtp 22 represents an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- Rtp 22 is preferably an aryl group having a substituent at least in the ortho position.
- Rtp 71 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- Any of Rtp 21 , Rtp 22 and Rtp 71 represents a binding site with the repeating unit, and Rtp 71 is preferably a binding site with the repeating unit.
- the triarylmethane structure is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP3A).
- Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- Rtp 22 each independently represents an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms
- X represents an anion Or X is absent and at least one of Rtp 21 and Rtp 22 contains an anion
- * represents the binding site with repeat unit A.
- the general formula (TP3) have the same meanings as rtp 21, rtp 22 of, and preferred ranges are also the same.
- Substituent group A Substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heterocyclic groups, cyano groups, hydroxy groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, silyloxy groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, acyloxy groups.
- Carbamoyloxy group amino group (including alkylamino group and anilino group), acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group, Mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, alkyl or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl or arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group A carbamoyl group, an aryl or heterocyclic azo group, an imido group, a phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, and a silyl group.
- the repeating unit A is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP3-1).
- Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- Rtp 22 each independently represents an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms
- Rtp 21 71a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group
- L 1 represents a divalent linking group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
- Rtp 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- X represents an anion, or X does not exist
- At least one of Rtp 21 and Rtp 22 contains an anion.
- Rtp 21 and Rtp 22 are synonymous with Rtp 21 and Rtp 22 in the general formula (TP3) described above, and preferred ranges thereof are also the same.
- Rtp 71a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group, and an alkylene group is preferable.
- the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic.
- the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Unsubstituted is preferred.
- L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- L 1 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (A) described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
- the atom constituting the chain connecting the main chain of the repeating unit A and the nitrogen atom to which Rtp 71a of the triarylmethane structure is bonded in the “—Rtp 71a -L 1 —” portion, the atom constituting the chain connecting the main chain of the repeating unit A and the nitrogen atom to which Rtp 71a of the triarylmethane structure is bonded.
- the number is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 20 or less, for example.
- the repeating unit A is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP3-2).
- Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- Rtp 24 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
- Rtp 25 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms
- Rtp 71a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group
- Rtp 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- L 1 represents a single bond or X represents an anion, or X does not exist and at least one of Rtp 21 and Rtp 24 includes an anion.
- Rtp 21 is preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- Rtp 24 is preferably independently an alkyl group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
- Rtp 25 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, the alkyl group preferably has 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
- Rtp 71a has the same meaning as rtp 71a in general formula (TP3-1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
- L 1 has the same meaning as L 1 in formula (TP3-1) described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
- repeating unit A examples include the following structures, but the present invention is not limited to these.
- Specific examples of the repeating unit A include a repeating unit derived from a monomer having a triarylmethane structure, which will be described later.
- the polymer TP includes a repeating unit B having a crosslinkable group.
- the repeating unit B is preferably contained in an amount of 1 to 99% by mass in all the repeating units of the polymer TP.
- the upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less, and still more preferably 90% by mass or less.
- the lower limit is more preferably 2% by mass or more, and further preferably 3% by mass or more.
- crosslinkable group a known crosslinkable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, acid, or heat can be used.
- a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group , A group represented by —C—O—R (wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), a carbonate group, and the like.
- R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms
- carbonate group and the like.
- examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and a dicyclopentenyl group.
- the crosslinkable group includes an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an oxazoline group, a group represented by —C—O—R (where R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), a carbonate group, ) At least one selected from an acryloyl group and a vinyl group is preferable, and an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group is more preferable.
- the crosslinkable group possessed by the polymer TP reacts with the crosslinkable groups possessed by the polymer TP, or reacts with the crosslinkable groups possessed by an alkali-soluble binder or a crosslinking agent.
- repeating unit B examples include the following specific examples. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
- the polymer TP may further have a repeating unit other than the above repeating units A and B.
- other repeating units include repeating units derived from at least one of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, and (meth) acrylic acid amide.
- Specific examples include a repeating unit having an acid group.
- the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
- the ratio of the repeating unit containing the repeating unit having an acid group may be, for example, 10 to 80% by mass in all the repeating units of the polymer TP. Preferably, 10 to 60% by mass is more preferable.
- repeating units include lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, —COCH 2 CO—, development promoting groups such as cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryl groups, polyalkylene oxide groups, hydroxy groups, maleimides It may have a functional group such as a hydrophilicity adjusting group such as a group or an amino group.
- the polymer TP preferably has a structure containing a repeating unit derived from at least one of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, and (meth) acrylic acid amide.
- the above-described repeating unit A and / or repeating unit B is a repeating unit derived from at least one of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester and (meth) acrylic amide
- the aspect whose repeating unit is a repeating unit derived from at least 1 sort (s) of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, and (meth) acrylic acid amide is mentioned.
- the weight average molecular weight of the polymer TP is preferably 3000 to 500,000.
- the lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more, still more preferably 7000 or more, and particularly preferably 10,000 or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 200000 or less, more preferably 100000 or less, and particularly preferably 50000 or less. That is, the weight average molecular weight of the polymer TP is particularly preferably 10,000 to 50,000.
- Heat resistance and solvent resistance are good by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer TP to the above-described range. Furthermore, the voltage characteristics can be improved.
- the number average molecular weight of the polymer TP is preferably 2,000 to 500,000.
- the lower limit is preferably 2500 or more, more preferably 3000 or more, still more preferably 4000 or more, and particularly preferably 5000 or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 70000 or less, and particularly preferably 50000 or less.
- the dispersity (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight) of the polymer TP is preferably 1.0 to 5.0.
- the upper limit is preferably 4.0 or less, more preferably 3.5 or less, and particularly preferably 2.0 or less.
- the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight of the polymer TP are polystyrene-converted values in gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) measurement, and specifically are values measured by the method described in the examples described later.
- the content of the compound A having a triarylmethane structure and a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less is 20% by mass or less, preferably 10% by mass or less, preferably 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the polymer TP. % Or less is more preferable, 1% by mass or less is particularly preferable, and it can be substantially not contained.
- substantially not containing means that, for example, the content of compound A is preferably 0.1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.01% by mass or less, and not more than 0.1% by mass with respect to the mass of the polymer TP. preferable.
- Compound A is a compound having a triarylmethane structure, and specifically means an unreacted material such as a raw material monomer having a triarylmethane structure, or a raw material monomer-containing impurity having no polymerizable group. To do.
- the content of Compound A in the polymer TP can be measured by detecting with ultraviolet light in the GPC measurement of the polymer TP.
- the content of Compound A in the polymer TP is 2 for TSKgel ⁇ -M (Tosoh Corp., 7.8 mm (inner diameter) ⁇ 30 cm) using HLC-8020GPC (Tosoh Corp.).
- the column is connected in series, and the measurement conditions are N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) solution with a sample concentration of 0.35% by mass, a flow rate of 0.3 mL / min, and a sample injection amount of 10 ⁇ L. It is a value obtained by setting the temperature to 40 ° C. and using an ultraviolet detector.
- NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
- the polymer TP is preferably a polymer containing a repeating unit represented by the general formula (TP-7).
- each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 1a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group.
- L 11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
- L 12 and L 13 represent a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
- R 2 represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
- R 3 represents a crosslinkable group
- X represents a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion or a sulfonate anion
- a to d are mass ratios of repeating units, a and d each represent a number exceeding 0, and b and c each independently represent a number of 0 or more.
- each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group is preferably linear.
- R 2 represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or cyclic.
- the hydrocarbon group is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and is preferably an alkyl group.
- R 2 is preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
- the number of carbon atoms in the cyclic alkyl group is preferably 6 to 8, and more preferably 6.
- the linear alkyl group preferably has 1 or 2 carbon atoms, more preferably 1.
- the branched alkyl group preferably has 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
- the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent, and the substituent is preferably a hydroxy group. As an example of the case where the hydrocarbon group has a substituent, a hydroxyethyl group is preferable.
- R 3 represents a crosslinkable group.
- the crosslinkable group includes an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an oxazoline group, and a group represented by —C—O—R (where R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms). And at least one selected from carbonate groups.
- R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and a dicyclopentenyl group.
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a methyl group.
- R 1a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group, and an alkylene group is preferred.
- the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic.
- the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Unsubstituted is preferred. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the substituent group A described above.
- L 11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
- the divalent linking group is selected from an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and —CO—, —OCO—, —O—, —NH— and —SO 2 —. Group which combines 1 type is mentioned.
- the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an alkylene group, or a linking group in which the alkylene groups are linked via one or more selected from —O—, —COO—, and —OCO—.
- L 12 and L 13 each represent a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
- the divalent linking group is selected from an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and —CO—, —OCO—, —O—, —NH— and —SO 2 —.
- Group which combines 1 type is mentioned.
- the alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituent group A described above. Of these, a hydroxy group is preferred.
- the “—L 11 —R 1a —” moiety the atoms constituting the chain connecting the main chain of the repeating unit A and the nitrogen atom to which R 1a of the triarylmethane structure is bonded.
- the number is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 20 or less, for example.
- X represents a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion or a sulfonate anion, and a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion is preferred.
- the compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion may be a monomer or a multimer.
- the compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (AN1) described above.
- the compound containing a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (AN2) described above.
- the compound containing a sulfonate anion is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (AN3) described above.
- a to d are mass ratios of repeating units, a and d represent a number exceeding 0, and b and c each independently represent a number of 0 or more.
- a is preferably 0.01 to 0.99.
- b represents an integer of 0 or more, and preferably 0 to 90.
- c represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 90.
- d is preferably from 0.01 to 0.99.
- polymer TP Although the specific example of polymer TP is shown to this invention below, it is not limited to these.
- the polymer TP of the present invention comprises a triarylmethane monomer having a triarylmethane structure represented by at least one selected from general formula (TP1a) and general formula (TP2a), and a monomer having a crosslinkable group. It can be produced by polymerizing at least raw material monomers.
- the raw material monomer may further include a monomer having an acid group and a monomer having a functional group described in the above-described other repeating unit.
- Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- Rtp 5 , Rtp 6 , Rtp 8 , Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 are each Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 71 Rtp 72
- Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- Rtp 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
- a, b, c and d each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; when a, b, c and d are 2 or more, Rtp 5, Rtp 6, two of Rtp 8 and Rtp 9 are each, linked may form a ring; or
- X is an anion, Rtp 1 ⁇ Rtp 11 without X is
- Rtp 1 ⁇ Rtp 11, Rtp 71 , Rtp 72 and X in general formula (TP1a), and, rtp 1 ⁇ rtp 11 of the general formula (TP2a), rtp 71, have the same meanings as rtp 72 and X, the preferred range is also It is the same.
- at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a polymerizable group. It is preferable that at least one of Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a polymerizable group.
- the polymerizable group include a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, and a styryl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
- the polymerization temperature is preferably 40 to 90 ° C, more preferably 50 to 70 ° C.
- the polymerization is preferably performed in a solution containing the above-mentioned raw material monomers in a total amount of 30 to 60% by mass.
- the content of the raw material monomer in the solution is more preferably 35 to 55% by mass, still more preferably 40 to 55% by mass. If content of a raw material monomer is the said range, it can make it easy to advance superposition
- the solvent used in the preparation of the raw material monomer reaction solution include solvents that may be contained in the coloring composition described below.
- a chain transfer agent may be added during the polymerization.
- an alkyl mercaptan is preferable, and an alkyl mercaptan having 4 or more carbon atoms or an alkyl mercaptan substituted with a carboxy group, an ether group or an ester group is preferable.
- dodecyl mercaptan and dipentaerythritol hexa-3-mercaptopropionate are preferable from the viewpoint of odor, and thiomalic acid and mercaptopropionic acid are preferable from the viewpoint of promoting developability.
- a purification treatment may be performed. Thereby, content of the compound A can be reduced.
- the content of the polymer TP is preferably 10 to 60% by mass and more preferably 10 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain one or more coloring compounds other than the above-described polymer TP.
- coloring compounds include dye compounds, pigment compounds, and dispersions thereof.
- the pigment compound When the pigment compound is blended as a dispersion, it can be prepared according to the descriptions in JP-A-9-197118 and JP-A-2000-239544.
- the dye compound examples include azo compounds (for example, Solvent Yellow 162), anthraquinone compounds (for example, anthraquinone compounds described in JP-A-2001-10881), and phthalocyanine compounds (for example, phthalocyanine described in US 2008 / 0076044A1).
- Compound xanthene series (for example, C.I. Acid Red Red 289), triarylmethane series (for example, C.I. Acid Blue 7)
- C.I. Acid Blue 83 CI Acid Blue 83
- C.I. Acid Blue 90 C.I. Acid Blue 90
- C.I. Solvent Blue 38 C.I.
- Solvent Blue 38 Sea I A Violet 17 (CI Acid Violet 17), CI Acid violet 49 (CI Acid violet 49), CI Acid Green 3), methine And dyes, xanthene dyes (for example, JP 2010-32999 A), dipyrromethene metal complex compounds (for example, JP 2012-237985 A), and the like.
- pigment compounds include perylene, perinone, quinacridone, quinacridonequinone, anthraquinone, anthanthrone, benzimidazolone, disazo condensation, disazo, azo, indanthrone, phthalocyanine, triarylcarbonium, dioxazine, aminoanthraquinone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, Indigo, thioindigo, isoindoline, isoindolinone, pyranthrone, isoviolanthrone and the like.
- perylene compound pigments such as Pigment Red 190, Pigment Red 224, and Pigment Violet 29, perinone compound pigments such as Pigment Orange 43, and Pigment Red 194, Pigment Violet 19, and Pigment Violet. 42, quinacridone such as Pigment Red 122, Pigment Red 192, Pigment Red 202, Pigment Red 207, or Pigment Red 209, quinacridone compound pigment, Pigment Red 206, Pigment Orange 48, or Pigment Orange 49 Quinone compound pigment, anthraquinone compound pigment such as pigment yellow 147, anthanthrone compound pigment such as pigment red 168, pigment Benzimidazolone compound pigments such as Pigment Brown 25, Pigment Violet 32, Pigment Orange 36, Pigment Yellow 120, Pigment Yellow 180, Pigment Yellow 181, Pigment Orange 62, or Pigment Red 185; Yellow 93, Pigment Yellow 94, Pigment Yellow 95, Pigment Yellow 128, Pigment Yellow 166, Pigment Orange 34, Pigment Orange 13, Pigment Orange 31, Pigment Red 144
- a color material of green to cyan is preferable, such as Pigment Green 7, Pigment Green 36, Pigment Green 37, Pigment Green 58, Pigment Blue 16, Pigment Blue 75, or Pigment Blue 15.
- Phthalocyanine compound pigments triarylcarbonium compound pigments such as pigment blue 56 or pigment blue 61, dioxazine compound pigments such as pigment violet 23 or pigment violet 37, aminoanthraquinone compound pigments such as pigment red 177, Pigment Red 254, Pigment Red 255, Pigment Red 264, Pigment Red 272, Pigment Orange 71, Pigment Orange 73, etc.
- Ketopyrrolopyrrole compound pigments thioindigo compound pigments such as Pigment Red 88, isoindolin compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 139 and Pigment Orange 66, isoindolinone compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 109 or Pigment Orange 61, Pyranthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Orange 40 or CI Pigment Red 216, or isoviolanthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Violet 31 are preferred.
- the other colored compound preferably includes at least one selected from a xanthene compound, a dipyrromethene metal complex compound, an oxazine compound, and a phthalocyanine compound, and includes at least one selected from a xanthene compound and a dipyrromethene metal complex compound. More preferably.
- the xanthene compound is a compound having a xanthene skeleton in the molecule.
- CI Color Index
- Acid Red 51 hereinafter, description of CI Acid Red is omitted, and only the number is described. Others are also the same
- CI Color Index
- the xanthene compound preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (1a) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “compound (1a)”).
- Compound (1a) may be a tautomer thereof.
- the content of the compound (1a) in the xanthene compound is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and further preferably 90% by mass or more. In particular, it is preferable to use only the compound (1a) as the xanthene compound.
- R 1 to R 4 each independently have a hydrogen atom, a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and —CH 2 — contained in the saturated hydrocarbon group is substituted with —O—, —CO— or —NR 11 —.
- R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom, and R 3 and R 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom;
- R 5 is, -OH, -SO 3 -, -SO 3 H, -SO 3 - Z +, -CO 2 H, -CO 2 - Z +, -CO 2 R 8, -SO 3 R 8 or -SO 2 represents NR 9 R 10 ;
- R 6 and R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
- m1 represents an integer of 0 to 5.
- the plurality of R 5 may be the same or different; m2 and m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3. when m2 and m3 are each independently 2 or 3, a plurality of R 6 and R 7 may be independently the same or different; a represents 0 or 1; when a represents 0, any group of R 1 to R 7 has an anion; X ⁇ represents an anion; Z + represents N + (R 11 ) 4 , Na + or K + , and four R 11 may be the same or different; R 8 represents a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atom contained in the saturated hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a halogen atom; R 9 and R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and —CH 2 — contained in the saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group is —O—, It may be substituted with —CO—, —NH— or —
- Examples of the monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms in R 1 to R 4 include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a propylphenyl group, and a butylphenyl group.
- a toluyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, and a propylphenyl group are preferable, and a toluyl group and a xylyl group are particularly preferable, and among these, a 2,6-disubstituted xylyl group is preferable.
- the aromatic hydrocarbon group substituent which may have a halogen atom, -R 8, -OH, -OR 8 , -SO 3 -, - SO 3 H, -SO 3 - Z +, -CO 2 H, —CO 2 R 8 , —SR 8 , —SO 2 R 8 , —SO 3 R 8 or —SO 2 NR 9 R 10 may be mentioned.
- substituent -SO 3 -, - SO 3 H, -SO 3 - Z + and -SO 2 NR 9 R 10 is preferably, -SO 3 - Z + and -SO 2 NR 9 R 10 Is more preferable.
- the Z +, -SO 3 - - - SO 3 in this case N + (R 11) 4 are preferred.
- Examples of the ring formed by combining R 1 and R 2 with each other and the ring formed by combining R 3 and R 4 with each other include the following. Among these, the following structures are preferable from the viewpoint of compound stability.
- Examples of the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in R 8 to R 11 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a nonyl group.
- Linear alkyl groups such as decyl group, dodecyl group, hexadecyl group, icosyl group; branched alkyl groups such as isopropyl group, isobutyl group, isopentyl group, neopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group; cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group And alicyclic saturated hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms such as cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, cyclooctyl group and tricyclodecyl group.
- a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyl group are preferable, and a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, A 2-ethylhexyl group is preferred.
- the hydrogen atom contained in the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms may be substituted with, for example, an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms or a halogen atom.
- Examples of —OR 8 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, a butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, a heptyloxy group, an octyloxy group, a 2-ethylhexyloxy group, and an icosyloxy group.
- a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, and a butoxy group are preferable.
- Examples of —CO 2 R 8 include a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, a propoxycarbonyl group, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, a hexyloxycarbonyl group, and an icosyloxycarbonyl group. Of these, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, and a propoxycarbonyl group are preferable.
- Examples of —SR 8 include a methylsulfanyl group, an ethylsulfanyl group, a butylsulfanyl group, a hexylsulfanyl group, a decylsulfanyl group, and an icosylsulfanyl group.
- Examples of —SO 2 R 8 include a methylsulfonyl group, an ethylsulfonyl group, a butylsulfonyl group, a hexylsulfonyl group, a decylsulfonyl group, and an icosylsulfonyl group.
- Examples of —SO 3 R 8 include a methoxysulfonyl group, an ethoxysulfonyl group, a propoxysulfonyl group, a tert-butoxysulfonyl group, a hexyloxysulfonyl group, and an icosyloxysulfonyl group.
- —SO 2 NR 9 R 10 includes, for example, a sulfamoyl group; N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N-propylsulfamoyl group, N-isopropylsulfamoyl group, N-butylsulfamoyl group, N-isobutylsulfamoyl group, N- sec-butylsulfamoyl group, N-tert-butylsulfamoyl group, N-pentylsulfamoyl group, N- (1-ethylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (1,1-dimethylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (1,2-dimethylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (2-ethylhexyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (2
- N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N-propylsulfamoyl group, N-isopropylsulfamoyl group, N-butylsulfamoyl group, N-pentylsulfamoyl group, N -(2-ethylhexyl) sulfamoyl group is preferred, N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N-propylsulfamoyl group, N-butylsulfamoyl group, N- (2-ethylhexyl) A sulfamoyl group is more preferred.
- the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in R 9 and R 10 may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and a halogen atom.
- R 5 is, -CO 2 H, -CO 2 - Z +, -CO 2 R 8, -CO 2 NHR 9, -SO 3 -, -SO 3 - Z +, -SO 3 H, -SO 2 R 8 or -SO 2 NHR 9 is preferably,, -SO 3 -, -SO 3 - Z +, -SO 3 H or -SO 2 NHR 9 is more preferable.
- m1 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
- R 6 and R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- m2 and m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3, with 0 being preferred.
- Examples of the aralkyl group having 7 to 10 carbon atoms in R 11 include a benzyl group, a phenylethyl group, and a phenylbutyl group.
- a represents 0 or 1
- R 1 to R 7 preferably has an anion
- R 5 preferably has an anion.
- X ⁇ is included depending on the valence of the cation contained in the general formula (1a), and is usually monovalent or divalent, and monovalent is preferable.
- the anion X ⁇ include a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, and a low nucleophilic anion.
- a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion or an iodine anion is preferable. .
- the low nucleophilic anion indicates an anion structure in which an organic acid having a pKa lower than that of sulfuric acid is dissociated.
- anions include low nucleophilic anions described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP2007-310315, anions described in paragraphs 0016 to 0025 of JP2012-173399, and JP2013-037316A.
- Examples include the anion moiety described in paragraphs 0025 to 0033, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- Z + is N + (R 11 ) 4 , Na + or K + , preferably N + (R 11 ) 4 .
- N + (R 11 ) 4 is preferably a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, at least two of the four R 11 . Further, the total carbon number of the four R 11 is preferably 20 to 80, and more preferably 20 to 60.
- the compound (1a) is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (3a) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “compound (3a)”).
- Compound (3a) may be a tautomer thereof.
- R 31 and R 32 each independently represents a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the hydrogen atom contained in the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms may be substituted with an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms or a halogen atom.
- a hydrogen atom contained in an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms may be substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and is contained in a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- —CH 2 — may be substituted with —O—, —CO— or —NR 11 —.
- R 33 and R 34 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfanyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- R 31 and R 33 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom
- R 32 and R 34 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom.
- p and q each independently represents an integer of 0 to 5. When p is 2 or more, the plurality of R 33 may be the same or different. When q is 2 or more, the plurality of R 34 may be the same or different.
- R 11 has the same meaning as R 11 in the general formula (1a).
- Examples of the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in R 31 and R 32 include carbon among the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms described for R 8 in the general formula (1a). Examples thereof include monovalent saturated hydrocarbon groups of several 1 to 10. Of these, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, hexyl and 2-ethylhexyl are preferred. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms which may be present as a substituent include the monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms described for R 1 in the general formula (1a). Can be mentioned.
- alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in which the hydrogen atom contained in the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms may be substituted include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group.
- R 31 and R 32 are preferably each independently a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in R 33 and R 34 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, and a tert-butyl group. Of these, a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group are preferable.
- Examples of the alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms for R 33 and R 34 include a methylsulfonyl group, an ethylsulfonyl group, a propylsulfonyl group, a butylsulfonyl group, and an isopropylsulfonyl group.
- P and q are preferably integers of 0 to 2, preferably 0 or 1.
- the compound (1a) include compounds represented by the formulas (1-1) to (1-43) described in paragraph numbers 0039 to 0046 of JP-A-2014-005451. Are incorporated herein.
- xanthene compound a commercially available xanthene dye (for example, “Chugai Aminol Fast Pink RH / C” manufactured by Chugai Kasei Co., Ltd., “Rhodamin 6G” manufactured by Taoka Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) can be used. .
- a commercially available xanthene dye can be used as a starting material and synthesized with reference to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-32999, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- dipyrromethene-based metal complex compound examples include compounds in which the compound represented by the general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound.
- R 1 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
- R 7 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
- substituents examples include the above-described substituent group A.
- substituent group A When the substituent is a group that can be further substituted, it may be further substituted with any of the above-described substituents. In addition, when it has two or more substituents, those substituents may be the same or different.
- R 1 and R 2 , R 2 and R 3 , R 4 and R 5 , and R 5 and R 6 are each independently bonded to each other to form 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered
- a ring may be formed.
- the ring formed include a saturated ring and an unsaturated ring.
- Examples of the 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered saturated ring or unsaturated ring include a pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, Examples include a piperidine ring, a cyclopentene ring, a cyclohexene ring, a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring and a pyridazine ring, and preferably a benzene ring and a pyridine ring.
- the formed 5-membered, 6-membered and 7-membered rings are further substitutable groups, they may be substituted with any of the above-mentioned substituent group A, and two or more substituents may be substituted. When substituted with a group, the substituents may be the same or different.
- R 1 and R 6 are preferably an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, a carbonamido group, a ureido group, an imide group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, a sulfonamido group, a carbonamido group, a ureido group, An alkoxycarbonylamino group and a sulfonamide group are more preferable, a carbonamide group, a ureido group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, and a sulfonamide group are more preferable, and a carbonamide group and a ureido group are particularly preferable.
- R 2 and R 5 are preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a nitrile group, an imide group, a carbamoylsulfonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, Aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, nitrile group, imide group, carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, nitrile group, imide group, carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, An alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, and a carbamoyl group are particularly preferable.
- R 3 and R 4 are preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group, an
- the alkyl group is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, methyl group, ethyl Group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, cyclopropyl group, n-butyl group, i-butyl group, tert-butyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, and benzyl group.
- a branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is preferred, and examples thereof include isopropyl group, cyclopropyl group, i-butyl group, tert-butyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, and cyclohexyl group.
- a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable, and examples thereof include an isopropyl group, a cyclopropyl group, an i-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a cyclobutyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
- the aryl group is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
- the heterocyclic group includes a 2-thienyl group, 4-pyridyl group, 3-pyridyl group, 2-pyridyl group, 2-furyl group, 2-pyrimidinyl group, 2 A benzothiazolyl group, a 1-imidazolyl group, a 1-pyrazolyl group or a benzotriazol-1-yl group, more preferably a 2-thienyl group, a 4-pyridyl group, a 2-furyl group, a 2-pyrimidinyl group or a 1-pyridyl group preferable.
- the metal or metal compound may be any metal atom or metal compound capable of forming a complex, a divalent metal atom, a divalent metal oxide, a divalent metal hydroxide, or 2 Valent metal chlorides are included.
- a preferred embodiment of the dipyrromethene-based metal complex compound in which the compound represented by the general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound is described in paragraphs 0153 to 0176 of JP2012-237985A.
- the complex compounds represented by 1), (I-2) or (I-3) can be taken into account, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the description in paragraphs 0179 to 0186 of JP2012-237985A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the coloring composition of the present invention contains other coloring compounds, it is preferably 0.5 to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition of the present invention. Further, it is preferably added to the coloring composition so that the absorption intensity ratio (absorption at 450 nm / absorption at 650 nm) is in the range of 0.95 to 1.05.
- the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
- the polymerizable compound include addition polymerizable compounds having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
- ⁇ is selected from compounds having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more.
- Such compound groups are widely known in this industrial field, and in the present invention, these compounds can be used without any particular limitation. These may be in any chemical form such as, for example, monomers, prepolymers, i.e. dimers, trimers and oligomers, or mixtures thereof and their (co) polymers. Monomers are preferred.
- Examples of monomers and their (co) polymers include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, amides, and these (Co) polymers, preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and these (co) polymers It is a polymer.
- unsaturated carboxylic acids for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
- esters amides
- these (Co) polymers preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and these (co) polymers It is a polymer
- reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as hydroxy group, amino group, mercapto group, monofunctional or polyfunctional are also preferably used.
- an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol, and a halogen group A substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable.
- paragraph numbers 0156 to 0159 of JP-A-2014-208808 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-320; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Company-made) dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) And a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are bonded via an ethylene glycol or propylene glycol residue.
- These oligomer types can also be used.
- the structure, details of usage such as single use or combination, addition amount and the like can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of the coloring composition.
- a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable.
- those having three or more functionalities are preferable, and those having different functional numbers and different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, styrene compound, vinyl ether compound) are used in combination.
- a method of adjusting both sensitivity and intensity is also effective.
- compatibility may be improved by the use of a low-purity compound or a combination of two or more.
- a specific structure may be selected from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a substrate.
- the content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 15 to 75% by mass, and more preferably 20 to 60% from the viewpoint of more effectively obtaining the effects of the present invention. Mass% is particularly preferred.
- the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound or two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
- the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can polymerize a polymerizable compound, and is preferably selected from the viewpoints of characteristics, initiation efficiency, absorption wavelength, availability, cost, and the like.
- the photopolymerization initiator examples include at least one active halogen compound selected from halomethyloxadiazole compounds and halomethyl-s-triazine compounds, 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, lophine dimers, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds And derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, and oxime compounds.
- active halogen compound selected from halomethyloxadiazole compounds and halomethyl-s-triazine compounds, 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, lophine dimers, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds And derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, and oxime compounds.
- Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator include those described in paragraphs [0070] to [0077] of JP-A No. 2004-295116.
- the oxime compound (hereinafter also referred to as “oxime photopolymerization initiator”) is not particularly limited, and is described in, for example, JP-A No. 2000-80068, WO 02 / 100903A1, and JP-A No. 2001-233842. These oxime compounds are mentioned. As specific examples of the oxime compound, the description in paragraph 0053 of JP2013-182215A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- the oxime compound is more preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2).
- R and X each represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, Ar represents an aryl group, and n represents an integer of 1 to 5. .
- R is preferably an acyl group from the viewpoint of high sensitivity, and specifically, an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a benzoyl group, and a toluyl group are preferable.
- A represents an alkylene group substituted with an unsubstituted alkylene group or an alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a tert-butyl group, or a dodecyl group) from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloration with heating.
- An alkylene group substituted with an alkenyl group eg, vinyl group, allyl group
- an aryl group eg, phenyl group, p-tolyl group, xylyl group, cumenyl group, naphthyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group, styryl group
- An alkylene group substituted with is preferred.
- Ar is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group from the viewpoint of increasing sensitivity and suppressing coloration with heating.
- the substituent is preferably a halogen group such as a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom.
- X is an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthioxy group, an arylthioxy group or an amino group from the viewpoint of improving solvent solubility and absorption efficiency in the long wavelength region.
- n is preferably an integer of 1 to 2.
- R 101 represents an alkyl group, an alkanoyl group, an alkenoyl group, an aryloyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, an arylthiocarbonyl.
- Rf represents a carbocyclic aromatic group or a heterocyclic aromatic group.
- R102 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, which may be substituted.
- R 103 and R 104 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and these groups are further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyl group or the like. Also good.
- R 105 to R 111 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloyl group, a heteroaryloyl group, an alkylthio group, an aryloylthio group, or a heteroaryloyl group.
- the compound having a fluorene structure represented by the general formula (2) include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0087 to 0088 of JP 2014-177502 A, the contents of which are described in this specification. It will be incorporated.
- the compound having a fluorene structure represented by the general formula (2) can be synthesized according to a synthesis method described in, for example, WO2014-050738.
- oxime photopolymerization initiators include IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arcles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA), Adeka Arcles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA) and the like can be used.
- biimidazole compound As specific examples of the biimidazole compound, the description in paragraphs 0061 to 0070 of JP2013-182213A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
- Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and compounds described in JP-A 2013-164471 ( C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
- the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 3 to 20% by mass, more preferably 4 to 19% by mass, from the viewpoint of more effectively obtaining the effects of the present invention. 18% by mass is particularly preferred.
- the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains an organic solvent.
- the organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it can satisfy the solubility of each coexisting component and the coating property when it is a colored composition, and in particular, the solubility, coating property, and safety of the binder. Is preferably selected in consideration of
- organic solvent examples include esters, ethers, ketones, and aromatic hydrocarbons, and specific examples include those described in paragraph numbers 0161 to 0162 of JP2012-032754A.
- the content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration in the composition is from 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably from 15 to 60% by mass.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the coloring composition of this invention contains the alkali-soluble binder.
- the alkali-soluble binder is not particularly limited except that it has alkali solubility, and can be preferably selected from the viewpoints of heat resistance, developability, availability, and the like.
- the alkali-soluble binder is preferably a linear organic polymer, soluble in an organic solvent, and developable with a weak alkaline aqueous solution.
- linear organic high molecular polymers include polymers having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-. No. 25957, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, etc. Examples thereof include polymers, maleic acid copolymers, partially esterified maleic acid copolymers, and acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain are also useful.
- the alkali-soluble binder in the present invention includes those obtained by adding an acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, poly (2-hydroxyethyl (meth)). Acrylate), polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene oxide, polyvinyl alcohol, and the like are also useful. Further, the linear organic high molecular polymer may be a copolymer of hydrophilic monomers.
- Examples include alkoxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, glycerol (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, N-methylol acrylamide, secondary or tertiary alkyl acrylamide, dialkylaminoalkyl (meth) Acrylate, morpholine (meth) acrylate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylcaprolactam, vinylimidazole, vinyltriazole, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, branched or linear propyl (meth) acrylate, branched or straight Examples include chain butyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyhydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and the like.
- hydrophilic monomers include tetrahydrofurfuryl group, phosphoric acid group, phosphoric ester group, quaternary ammonium base, ethyleneoxy chain, propyleneoxy chain, sulfonic acid group and groups derived from salts thereof, morpholinoethyl group, etc. Monomers comprising it are also useful.
- alkali-soluble binder a copolymer of maleimide and ethylene oxide as shown in (b1) or formula (b2) can also be preferably used.
- R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group, or an alkyl group.
- Examples of the alkyl group when R 1 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. Can be mentioned.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, and an amino group.
- R 1 represents an aryl group
- examples of the aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, a heteroaryl group containing a hetero atom, and the like. More specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
- the aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include an alkyl group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, and a cyclohexyl group, an alkoxy group such as a methoxy group, Examples thereof include a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
- R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 3 represents an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group, or an alkyl group
- m represents an integer of 1 to 15.
- Examples of the alkyl group when R 4 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. Can be mentioned.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, and an alkoxy group.
- Examples of the aryl group when R 4 represents an aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, and a heteroaryl group containing a heteroatom.
- a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthranyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, an indolyl group, an imidazolyl group, an oxazolyl group, a carbazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
- the aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include a nonyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group and other alkyl groups, and a methoxy group. Examples thereof include an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
- the alkali-soluble binder may have a polymerizable group in the side chain.
- a polymer containing an allyl group, a (meth) acryl group, an allyloxyalkyl group or the like in the side chain is also useful.
- examples of the above-mentioned polymer containing a polymerizable group include commercially available KS resist-106 (manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), cyclomer P series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and the like.
- alcohol-soluble nylon, polyether of 2,2-bis- (4-hydroxyphenyl) -propane and epichlorohydrin, etc. are also useful.
- polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable, and from the viewpoint of development control.
- acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable, and from the viewpoint of development control.
- a copolymer having a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (2) and an acidic group is preferred, and more preferably a structural unit represented by the general formula (3) in addition to the general formula (2) and the acidic group.
- R 20 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 21 to R 25 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
- R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- R 12 and R 13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an unsaturated double bond having 3 to 20 carbon atoms as a partial structure.
- R 12 and R 13 are not both hydrogen atoms, and at least one of R 12 and R 13 is a carbonyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms containing an unsaturated double bond as a partial structure. When represented, it may further contain a carboxy group as a partial structure.
- acrylic resins include copolymers composed of monomers selected from benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, and the like, and commercially available KS resist 106 (Osaka).
- benzyl (meth) acrylate (meth) acrylic acid, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, and the like
- commercially available KS resist 106 Osaka.
- Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P Series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and the like are preferable.
- the alkali-soluble binder may contain the structural unit derived from a compound with the following general formula (X).
- R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms
- R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or 1 to C carbon atoms that may contain a benzene ring.
- 20 alkyl groups are represented.
- n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
- the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring.
- Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
- the alkali-soluble binder preferably has a weight average molecular weight (polystyrene equivalent value measured by GPC method) of 1,000 to 200,00 from the viewpoint of developability, liquid viscosity, etc., and 2,000 to 100,000. Is more preferable, and 5,000 to 50,000 is particularly preferable.
- the acid value of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 1000 mg / KOH, more preferably 50 to 300 mg / KOH, still more preferably 50 to 200 mg / KOH, and particularly preferably 105 to 200 mg / KOH.
- the content of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 20 to 60% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
- the composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble binder or two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may further contain a crosslinking agent.
- the crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction.
- the crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction.
- at least selected from (a) an epoxy resin, (b) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group.
- the coloring composition of the present invention contains a crosslinking agent
- the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30%, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. % By mass.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant.
- the surfactant may be nonionic, cationic, or anionic, but a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure and a fluorosurfactant are preferred.
- a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure having an HLB (Hydrophile-Lipophile Balance) value in the range of 9.2 to 15.5 or a fluorosurfactant described in JP-A-2-54202 is preferred.
- the coloring composition of the present invention contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. 0.005 to 1.0 mass%.
- the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a dye stabilizer.
- a polymer surfactant polymer dispersant
- the polymer dispersant include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid such as polyacrylic acid; (Partial) ammonium salt and (partial) alkylamine salt; (co) polymer of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid ester such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylic acid ester or knitted product thereof; sulfonic acid or phosphoric acid having a crosslinkable group And the like.
- the crosslinkable group a known polymerizable group that can be cross-linked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used. Specific examples include (meth) acryl groups, styrene groups, vinyl groups, cyclic ether groups, and methylol groups, with (meth) acryl groups, styrene groups, and vinyl groups being preferred, and (meth) acryl groups and styrene groups being preferred. More preferred. It is also effective to add the following anion salts (lithium salt, sodium salt, potassium salt, etc.) as a dye stabilizer. When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a dye stabilizer, the content of the dye stabilizer is preferably 0.01 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. .5 to 30% by mass.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant.
- the antioxidant include a radical scavenger, a peroxide decomposer, an ultraviolet absorber, and a singlet oxygen quencher.
- the radical scavenger include phenolic antioxidants and hindered amine antioxidants.
- phenolic antioxidants include hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds, hydroxybenzyl compounds, thiobisphenol compounds, thiomethylphenol compounds, alkanediylphenol compounds, and the like. Of these, hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
- a peroxide decomposer is a compound that decomposes peroxides generated by exposure to light into harmless substances and prevents the generation of new radicals.
- phosphorus antioxidants for example, phosphorus antioxidants, sulfur And system antioxidants.
- sulfur-based antioxidants are preferable from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
- the ultraviolet absorber include salicylate-based antioxidants and benzophenone-based antioxidants.
- a singlet oxygen quencher is a compound that can deactivate singlet oxygen by energy transfer from oxygen in a singlet state.
- an ethylenic compound such as tetramethylethylene and cyclopentene, diethylamine, triethylamine, 1,4- Amines such as diazabicyclooctane (DABCO) and N-ethylimidazole, condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as optionally substituted naphthalene, dimethylnaphthalene, dimethoxyanthracene, anthracene and diphenylanthracene; 1,3-diphenylisobenzofuran
- aromatic compounds such as 1,2,3,4-tetraphenyl-1,3-cyclopentadiene and pentaphenylcyclopentadiene, Harry H. et al.
- transition metal chelate compounds such as nickel complexes, cobalt complexes, copper complexes, manganese complexes, and platinum complexes having bisdithio- ⁇ -diketone, bisphenyldithiol, and thiobisphenol as ligands.
- sulfur antioxidant include thiopropionate compounds and mercaptobenzimidazole compounds. Of these, thiopropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
- the antioxidants can be used alone or in admixture of two or more.
- the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the colorant.
- the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound that functions as a curing accelerator.
- a compound that functions as a curing accelerator For example, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of aromatic amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, amine salts, phosphonium salts, amidine salts, amide compounds, thiol compounds, blocked isocyanate compounds, and imidazole ring-containing compounds can be used.
- the coloring composition contains a curing accelerator, low-temperature curing of the coloring composition can be more effectively realized.
- the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved.
- Examples of commercially available curing accelerators include Karenz MT series such as Karenz MTBD-1 (manufactured by Showa Denko KK).
- a hardening accelerator can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types.
- the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
- the coloring composition of the present invention can also contain a reduction inhibitor.
- the reduction inhibitor is preferably a quinone compound, more preferably a quinone compound having a molecular weight of about 100 to 800 and having the following structure.
- the coloring composition of the present invention can also contain an acid generator.
- the acid generator may be a photoacid generator or a thermal acid generator, but a thermal acid generator is preferred. When a thermal acid generator is used, the heat resistance of the cured film tends to be further improved.
- the thermal acid generator refers to an acid generator that generates an acid when heated at 100 to 250 ° C. at 101.25 hPa.
- the acid generated is preferably an acid having a pKa of 5 or less. Specific examples of the acid generated include sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, phosphoric acid and the like, and sulfonic acid is more preferable.
- Thermal acid generators include ionic compounds (onium salts) and nonionic compounds.
- ionic compound (onium salt) those containing no heavy metal or halogen ion are preferable, and onium salts of sulfonic acid are preferable.
- Specific examples of the ionic thermal acid generator include triphenylsulfonium, 1-dimethylthionaphthalene, 1-dimethylthio-4-hydroxynaphthalene, 1-dimethylthio-4,7-dihydroxynaphthalene, 4-hydroxyphenyldimethyl.
- Sulfonium benzyl-4-hydroxyphenylmethylsulfonium, 2-methylbenzyl-4-hydroxyphenylmethylsulfonium, 2-methylbenzyl-4-acetylphenylmethylsulfonium, 2-methylbenzyl-4-benzoyloxyphenylmethylsulfonium, these Examples include methanesulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, camphorsulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, hexafluorophosphonate and the like.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may further contain a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt.
- Heat resistance can be improved by including a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt.
- the bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt include potassium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide, sodium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide, lithium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide and the like.
- the content of the bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt is preferably from 0.1 to 2 mol, more preferably from 0.3 to 0.8 mol, based on 1 mol of the triarylmethane repeating unit of the polymer TP.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may further contain various additives such as a filler, an ultraviolet absorber, an aggregation inhibitor, a sensitizer and a light stabilizer, as necessary.
- the coloring composition of this invention can be adjusted by mixing each component mentioned above and arbitrary components as needed.
- the components constituting the colored composition may be blended together, or may be blended sequentially after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent.
- the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
- the colored composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects.
- any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration.
- fluorine resins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resins such as nylon-6 and nylon-6,6, polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (including high density and ultra high molecular weight), etc.
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- polyamide resins such as nylon-6 and nylon-6,6, polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (including high density and ultra high molecular weight)
- PP polypropylene
- the pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.01 to 7.0 ⁇ m, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m. By setting it as this range, it becomes possible to remove reliably the fine foreign material which inhibits preparation of the uniform and smooth coloring composition in a post process.
- the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
- the pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
- a commercially available filter for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
- the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
- the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
- the colored composition of the present invention can form a cured film excellent in hue and contrast, for forming a colored layer (for forming colored pixels) such as a color filter used in an image display device or a solid-state imaging device, Moreover, it can use suitably as preparation uses, such as printing ink, inkjet ink, and a coating material.
- the cured film of the present invention is formed by curing the colored composition of the present invention.
- Such a cured film is preferably used for a color filter.
- the color filter of the present invention may be formed by any method as long as it can form a colored region (colored pattern) cured by applying the colored composition of the present invention on a substrate. Preferably, it is produced using the coloring composition of the present invention.
- the production method described in paragraphs 0359 to 0371 of JP2011-252065A can also be employed. .
- the method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes a step of forming a colored composition layer using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern-like manner, and an unexposed portion of the colored composition layer. And removing the film to form a colored pattern. Furthermore, you may provide the process (prebaking process) of baking a colored composition layer, and the process (post-baking process) of baking the developed coloring pattern as needed.
- the colored composition layer is formed by applying the colored composition of the present invention on the substrate.
- the substrate for example, alkali-free glass, sodium glass, Pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass used for liquid crystal display elements and the like, and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film thereto, solid-state imaging elements, and the like are used.
- the photoelectric conversion element substrate include a silicon substrate and a plastic substrate. On these substrates, a black matrix for isolating each pixel may be formed, or a transparent resin layer may be provided for promoting adhesion. Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the substrate in order to improve adhesion to the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or flatten the surface.
- the plastic substrate preferably has a gas barrier layer and / or a solvent resistant layer on its surface.
- a driving substrate on which a thin film transistor (TFT) of a thin film transistor (TFT) type color liquid crystal display device is disposed (hereinafter referred to as “TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate”) is used as the substrate.
- TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate a driving substrate on which a thin film transistor (TFT) of a thin film transistor (TFT) type color liquid crystal display device is disposed
- a color filter using the colored composition of the present invention can also be formed on the top to produce a color filter.
- the substrate in the TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate include glass, silicone, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. These substrates may be subjected to appropriate pretreatment such as chemical treatment with a silane coupling agent, plasma treatment, ion plating, sputtering, gas phase reaction method, vacuum deposition, etc., if desired.
- Application method of the coloring composition is preferably coating, and it is preferable to apply by a method such as spin coating, slit coating, cast coating, roll coating, bar coating, and ink jet.
- the colored composition layer formed on the substrate is preferably dried (prebaked).
- Pre-baking is performed in a temperature range of 50 ° C. to 140 ° C., preferably about 70 ° C. to 110 ° C., using a hot plate, an oven, or the like, and can be performed under conditions of 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
- pre-baking may be performed in combination with high-frequency processing.
- the high frequency treatment can be used alone.
- vacuum treatment can be performed before pre-baking.
- the degree of vacuum is preferably 13 to 133 Pa, and more preferably 26 to 66.5 Pa.
- the thickness of the colored composition layer formed from the colored composition is appropriately selected according to the purpose.
- a range of 0.2 to 5.0 ⁇ m is preferable, a range of 1.0 to 4.0 ⁇ m is more preferable, and a range of 1.5 to 3.5 ⁇ m is most preferable.
- a range of 0.2 to 5.0 ⁇ m is preferable, a range of 0.3 to 2.5 ⁇ m is more preferable, and a range of 0.3 to 1.5 ⁇ m is most preferable.
- the thickness of a coloring composition layer is a film thickness after prebaking.
- the film (colored composition layer) made of the colored composition formed on the substrate as described above is exposed through, for example, a photomask.
- a photomask As light or radiation applicable to exposure, g-line, h-line, i-line, j-line, KrF light and ArF light are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
- i-line is particularly preferable.
- the i-line to the irradiation light is preferably irradiated at an exposure dose of 100mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 10000mJ / cm 2.
- exposure rays include ultra high pressure, high pressure, medium pressure, low pressure mercury lamps, chemical lamps, carbon arc lamps, xenon lamps, metal halide lamps, various visible and ultraviolet laser light sources, fluorescent lamps, tungsten lamps, solar Light or the like can also be used.
- the irradiation light is preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 380 nm, and more preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 360 nm.
- the third harmonic (355 nm) of an Nd: YAG (yttrium, aluminum, garnet) laser which is a relatively inexpensive solid laser with a large output
- the XeCl (308 nm), XeF (353 nm) of an excimer laser can be suitably used.
- the exposure amount of the object to be exposed is in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 50 mJ / cm 2 . An exposure amount within this range is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern formation productivity.
- a color filter for a liquid crystal display device exposure using mainly h-line and i-line is preferably used by a proximity exposure machine and a mirror projection exposure machine. Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, it is preferable to mainly use i-line in a stepper exposure machine.
- the photomask used is for forming a depression such as a through hole in addition to a pattern for forming a pixel (colored pattern). Those provided with a pattern are used.
- the colored composition layer exposed as described above can be heated.
- the exposure can be performed while flowing a nitrogen gas in the chamber in order to suppress oxidation fading of the coloring material in the colored composition layer.
- Step of forming colored pattern Subsequently, development is performed with a developer on the colored composition layer after exposure. Thereby, a negative type or positive type coloring pattern (resist pattern) can be formed.
- the uncured portion of the coating film after exposure is eluted in the developer, and only the cured portion remains on the substrate.
- Any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the coating film (colored composition layer) of the colored composition in the uncured part, but does not dissolve the cured part.
- combinations of various organic solvents and alkaline aqueous solutions can be used. Examples of the organic solvent used for development include the above-described solvents that can be used when preparing the colored composition of the present invention.
- alkaline aqueous solution examples include tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate Sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0 ]
- concentration of an alkaline compound such as -7-undecene is 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
- alkali aqueous solution was dissolved at a.
- the alkali concentration is preferably adjusted to pH 11 to 13, more preferably pH 11.5 to 12.5.
- An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol, a surfactant, or the like can be added to the alkaline aqueous solution.
- the development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is 20 seconds to 90 seconds.
- Development may be any of a dip method, a shower method, a spray method, and the like, and may be combined with a swing method, a spin method, an ultrasonic method, or the like. It is also possible to prevent development unevenness by previously moistening the surface to be developed with water or the like before touching the developer. It is also possible to develop with the substrate tilted. Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, paddle development is also used.
- a rinsing process for washing and removing excess developer is performed, followed by drying, followed by heat treatment (post-baking) to complete the curing.
- the rinse treatment is usually performed with pure water, but to save liquid, pure water is used in the final cleaning, and used pure water is used in the initial stage of cleaning, or the substrate is inclined and cleaned. You may use the method of using ultrasonic irradiation together.
- a heat treatment at about 200 ° C. to 250 ° C. is usually performed.
- the coating film after development is continuously or batch-treated using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer) or a high-frequency heater so as to satisfy the above conditions. It can be done with an expression.
- a colored pattern (pixel) formed using a colored composition can be post-exposed by irradiating with ultraviolet rays.
- the colored pattern can be further cured by subjecting the formed colored pattern to heat treatment (so-called post-bake treatment).
- This heat treatment can be performed by, for example, a hot plate, various heaters, an oven, or the like.
- the temperature during the heat treatment is preferably 100 ° C. to 300 ° C., more preferably 150 ° C. to 250 ° C.
- the heating time is preferably about 10 minutes to 120 minutes.
- the colored pattern thus obtained constitutes a pixel in the color filter.
- the above steps may be repeated according to a desired number of colors.
- the post-exposure and / or post-bake treatment may be performed each time the formation, exposure, and development of a single-color coloring composition layer is completed (for each color), or all colors having a desired number of colors may be used. After the formation, exposure, and development of the composition layer are completed, the post-exposure and / or post-bake treatment may be performed collectively.
- the coloring composition of this invention is applicable also to the manufacturing method of the color filter containing a dry etching process.
- a step of forming a colored layer using the colored composition of the present invention Manufacturing comprising a step of forming a photoresist layer on a colored layer, a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask A method is mentioned.
- the color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter of the present invention (the color filter of the present invention) is excellent in hue and contrast because the colored composition of the present invention is used.
- the color filter of the present invention can be used for an image display device or a solid-state image sensor, and is particularly suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device. When used in a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to display an image having excellent spectral characteristics and contrast while achieving a good hue.
- the description has mainly focused on the use for forming the color pattern of the color filter in the above, but it is also applicable to the formation of a black matrix for isolating the color pattern (pixel) constituting the color filter. can do.
- a coloring composition containing a black pigment processed pigment such as carbon black or titanium black is used, followed by coating, exposure, and development, and then post-baking as necessary. Can be formed.
- the image display device of the present invention comprises the color filter of the present invention.
- the image display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence (organic EL) display device. It is particularly suitable for liquid crystal display devices.
- the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image with a good display image color and excellent display characteristics.
- the image display device For the definition of the image display device and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho) Issued in 1989).
- the liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
- the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
- the color filter of the present invention is particularly effective for a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type liquid crystal display device.
- the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
- the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching), a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment), a STN (Super-Twist Nematic).
- the color filter of the present invention can also be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
- the color filter of the present invention When the color filter of the present invention is used in an image display device, high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength cold-cathode tube, but further, red, green, and blue light-emitting diode light sources (RGB-LED) ) As a backlight, an image display device having high luminance and high color purity and good color reproducibility can be provided.
- RGB-LED red, green, and blue light-emitting diode light sources
- the solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention.
- the configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that includes the color filter of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device.
- transfer electrodes made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD (charge coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.) are provided.
- a nitride film formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving part.
- the device has a device protective film made of silicone or the like, and has the color filter for a solid-state imaging device of the present invention on the device protective film.
- the measurement conditions were N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) with a sample concentration of 0.35 mass%, a flow rate of 0.3 mL / min, a sample injection volume of 10 ⁇ L, a measurement temperature of 40 ° C., and an ultraviolet detector. This is the value obtained.
- NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
- An amount having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less was estimated and calculated from data obtained by GPC measurement.
- TAM1 was synthesized according to the following route.
- ⁇ TAM2-6> Synthesis was performed in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1 except that the amount of dodecyl mercaptan in the polymerization step was changed.
- TAM7-15> It synthesize
- TAM23> This compound was synthesized in the same manner as TAM3 except that Compound 3 was changed to N, N, N ′, N′-tetraethyl-4,4′-diaminobenzophenone.
- the coloring composition was prepared by mixing raw materials having the following composition.
- -composition- Colorant 5.1 parts by weight Polymerizable compound (T-1): 6.0 parts by weight Alkali-soluble binder (U-2): 5.3 parts by weight Photoinitiator (V-4) ... 0.3 parts by mass, curing accelerator (V-5) ... 0.2 parts by mass, solvent (X-1) ... 71 parts by mass, solvent (X-3) ... 13 parts by mass / Surfactant (Z-1) ... 0.01 parts by mass
- Colorant The following structure. In the following formula, the numerical value written in the repeating unit is the mass ratio of the charged raw materials.
- Surfactant (Z-1): The following mixture (Mw 14000)
- the colored curable resin composition obtained above was applied on a 100 mm ⁇ 100 mm glass substrate (1737, manufactured by Corning) by spin coating, and then dried at room temperature for 30 minutes to volatilize volatile components. To obtain a colored layer.
- This colored layer was irradiated with i-rays (wavelength 365 nm) exposed on the entire surface without using a photomask to form a latent image.
- An ultra-high pressure mercury lamp was used as the i-line light source, and it was irradiated as parallel light. At this time, the irradiation light quantity was 40 mJ / cm 2 .
- the colored layer on which the latent image was formed was developed with an aqueous solution of sodium carbonate / sodium bicarbonate (concentration 2.4%) at 26 ° C. for 45 seconds, and then rinsed with running water for 20 seconds. , Dried with spray. The dried film was baked at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes in a clean oven to obtain a cured film. The following evaluation was performed about the cured film obtained above.
- ⁇ Heat resistance> The color difference ⁇ Eab between the transmission spectrum of the cured film obtained above and the transmission spectrum when the cured film obtained above was additionally baked at 230 ° C. for 80 minutes was calculated. A smaller ⁇ Eab value indicates better heat resistance.
- ⁇ Eab is less than 2 ... 6 ⁇ Eab is 2 or more and less than 3 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 5 ⁇ Eab is 3 or more and less than 4 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 4 ⁇ Eab is 4 or more and less than 5 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 3 ⁇ Eab is 5 or more and less than 10 2 ⁇ Eab is 10 or more ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 1
- ⁇ Solvent resistance (color difference)>
- the cured film obtained above is heated at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 25 ° C. for 10 minutes, and the chromaticity before and after immersion is measured to change the color.
- the index ⁇ Eab was calculated.
- the ⁇ Eab value was calculated from the transmission spectrum of the cured film before and after being immersed in PGMEA. In addition, when the value of ⁇ Eab was 3 or less, the hue change was small and the solvent resistance was excellent.
- ⁇ Eab is 1.5 or more and less than 2, 5 ⁇ Eab is 2 or more and less than 3.5 4 ⁇ Eab is 3.5 or more and less than 4, 3 ⁇ Eab is 4 or more and less than 5, 2 ⁇ Eab is 5 or more ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 1
- a colored composition is applied onto a glass substrate with ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) electrode (trade name: 1737 manufactured by Corning) to a thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m after drying, and dried in an oven at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds ( Pre-baked). Thereafter, exposure was performed at 100 mJ / cm 2 without using a mask (illuminance was 20 mW / cm 2 ), and a 1% aqueous solution of an alkali developer (trade name: CDK-1, manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) was used. The film was developed at 25 ° C., washed with water and dried, and then heat-treated (post-baked) in an oven at 230 ° C.
- ITO Indium Tin Oxide
- the example was able to form a cured film excellent in heat resistance and solvent resistance. Furthermore, the cured film was excellent in voltage holding ratio. On the other hand, the comparative example could not achieve both heat resistance and solvent resistance.
- the coloring composition was prepared by mixing raw materials having the following composition.
- -composition- Colorant 5.1 parts by weight Polymerizable compound (T-1): 6.0 parts by weight Alkali-soluble binder (U-2): 5.3 parts by weight Photoinitiator (V-4) ... 0.3 parts by mass / curing accelerator (V-5) ... 0.2 parts by mass / additive (W-1) ... 0.5 parts by mass / solvent (X -1) ... 71 parts by mass, solvent (X-3) ... 13 parts by mass, surfactant (Z-1) ... 0.01 parts by mass
- Colorant Colorant described in the following table Polymerizable compound (T-1), alkali-soluble binder (U-2), photopolymerization initiator (V-4), curing accelerator (V-5), solvent (X -1), solvent (X-3), surfactant (Z-1): the above-described polymerizable compound (T-1), alkali-soluble binder (U-2), photopolymerization initiator (V-4), Curing accelerator (V-5), solvent (X-1), solvent (X-3), surfactant (Z-1) Additive (W-1): Potassium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide (Mitsubishi Materials Corporation)
- the heat resistance, solvent resistance and voltage holding ratio were evaluated in the same manner as in Test Example 1. The results are shown in the table below. From the above results, the example was able to form a cured film excellent in heat resistance and solvent resistance. Furthermore, the cured film was excellent in voltage holding ratio.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
- Structural Engineering (AREA)
- Architecture (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
- Optical Filters (AREA)
- Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal (AREA)
- Epoxy Resins (AREA)
- Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
- Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)
Abstract
Description
近年、カラーフィルタは、液晶表示素子用途においてモニターのみならずテレビへと用途が拡大する傾向にある。この用途拡大の傾向に伴い、カラーフィルタには、色度、コントラストなどにおいて高度の色特性が要求されるに至っている。また、イメージセンサ(固体撮像素子)用途のカラーフィルタにおいても、同様に色ムラの低減、色分解能の向上など色特性の更なる向上が求められるようになっている。
特許文献1、2には、トリアリールメタン構造を有する化合物を含む着色組成物が開示されている。 The coloring composition is used for manufacturing a color filter and the like.
In recent years, color filters tend to be used not only for monitors but also for televisions in liquid crystal display device applications. Along with this trend of expanding applications, color filters are required to have high color characteristics in terms of chromaticity and contrast. Similarly, color filters for image sensors (solid-state imaging devices) are required to further improve color characteristics such as reduction of color unevenness and improvement of color resolution.
Patent Documents 1 and 2 disclose a colored composition containing a compound having a triarylmethane structure.
しかしながら、特許文献1、2に開示された着色組成物は、耐熱性および耐溶剤性が十分ではなかった。 A coloring composition used for a color filter or the like is required to be able to form a film having excellent heat resistance and solvent resistance.
However, the coloring compositions disclosed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 are not sufficient in heat resistance and solvent resistance.
<1> 一般式(TP1)、および、一般式(TP2)から選ばれるトリアリールメタン構造を有する繰り返し単位Aを少なくとも1種、および、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位Bを含むポリマーTPと、重合性化合物と、を含み、
ポリマーTPは、重量平均分子量が3000~500000であり、トリアリールメタン構造を有する重量平均分子量1500以下の化合物Aの含有量が、ポリマーTPの質量に対して20質量%以下である、着色組成物;
<2> ポリマーTPは、化合物Aの含有量が、ポリマーTPの質量に対して10質量%以下である、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
<3> ポリマーTPの重量平均分子量が10000~50000である、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物。
<4> 繰り返し単位Bが有する架橋性基が、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、オキサゾリン基、-C-O-Rで表される基およびカーボネート基から選ばれる少なくとも1種である、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物;ただし、Rは水素原子または炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。
<5> Xが、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオン、ヨウ素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、過塩素酸アニオン、ボレートアニオン、PF6-およびSbF6-から選択される少なくとも1種のアニオン、ならびに、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する化合物から選択される、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物;
一般式(A1)
一般式(A2)
<6> Xが、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンまたはスルホン酸アニオンを含む化合物である、<1>~<5>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<7> Xが、架橋性基を含む化合物である、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<8> Xが、アニオン部位を有する繰り返し単位を含むポリマーである、<1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<9> 一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71およびRtp72の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で表される基で置換されている、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物;
一般式(P)
一般式(A1)
一般式(A2)
<10> 繰り返し単位Aが有するトリアリールメタン構造が、下記一般式(TP3)で表される、<1>~<9>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物;
<11> 繰り返し単位Aが下記一般式(TP3-1)で表される、<1>~<10>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物;
<12> 繰り返し単位Aが、下記一般式(TP3-2)で表される、<1>~<11>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物;
<13> ポリマーTPは、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルおよび(メタ)アクリル酸アミドの少なくとも1種に由来する繰り返し単位を含む、<1>~<12>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<14> キサンテン化合物、ジピロメテン系金属錯体化合物、ジオキサジン化合物およびフタロシアニン化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、<1>~<13>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<15> 光重合開始剤を含む、<1>~<14>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<16> ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド塩を含む、<1>~<15>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<17> カラーフィルタの着色層形成用である、<1>~<16>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<18> <1>~<17>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜。
<19> <18>に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。
<20> <1>~<17>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を用いて着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程と、を含むカラーフィルタの製造方法。
<21> <1>~<17>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を用いて着色組成物層を形成し、硬化して着色層を形成する工程と、着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、露光および現像することによりフォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程と、レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして着色層をドライエッチングする工程とを含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
<22> <19>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
<23> <19>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。
<24> 下記一般式(TP-7)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリマーであり、ポリマーの重量平均分子量が3000~500000であり、トリアリールメタン構造を有する重量平均分子量1500以下の化合物Aの含有量が、ポリマーの質量に対して20質量%以下である、ポリマー;
<1> Polymer TP containing at least one repeating unit A having a triarylmethane structure selected from general formula (TP1) and general formula (TP2) and a repeating unit B having a crosslinkable group, and polymerization And a sex compound,
The polymer TP has a weight average molecular weight of 3000 to 500,000, and the content of the compound A having a triarylmethane structure and a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less is 20% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer TP. ;
<2> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein the polymer TP has a content of the compound A of 10% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer TP.
<3> The colored composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the polymer TP has a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 to 50,000.
<4> The crosslinkable group of the repeating unit B is at least one selected from a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an oxazoline group, a group represented by —C—O—R, and a carbonate group. The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, which is a seed; wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
<5> X is at least one anion selected from fluorine anion, chlorine anion, bromine anion, iodine anion, cyanide ion, perchlorate anion, borate anion, PF 6− and SbF 6− , and − Selected from SO 3 − , —COO − , —PO 4 − , a compound having at least one structure selected from the structure represented by the following general formula (A1) and the structure represented by the following general formula (A2) A colored composition according to any one of <1> to <4>;
General formula (A1)
General formula (A2)
<6> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein X is a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, or a sulfonate anion.
<7> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein X is a compound containing a crosslinkable group.
<8> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein X is a polymer containing a repeating unit having an anion moiety.
<9> In general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 is substituted with a group represented by general formula (P), <1> to <4> the colored composition according to any one of the above;
General formula (P)
General formula (A1)
General formula (A2)
<10> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <9>, wherein the triarylmethane structure of the repeating unit A is represented by the following general formula (TP3);
<11> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <10>, wherein the repeating unit A is represented by the following general formula (TP3-1);
<12> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the repeating unit A is represented by the following general formula (TP3-2);
<13> The polymer TP contains a repeating unit derived from at least one of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, and (meth) acrylic acid amide, according to any one of <1> to <12> Coloring composition.
<14> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <13>, comprising at least one selected from a xanthene compound, a dipyrromethene metal complex compound, a dioxazine compound, and a phthalocyanine compound.
<15> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <14>, comprising a photopolymerization initiator.
<16> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <15>, comprising a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt.
<17> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <16>, which is used for forming a colored layer of a color filter.
<18> A cured film obtained by curing the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <17>.
<19> A color filter having the cured film according to <18>.
<20> A step of forming a colored composition layer using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <17>, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and a coloring composition layer And a step of developing and removing the unexposed portion to form a colored pattern.
<21> A step of forming a colored composition layer using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <17> and curing to form a colored layer; and forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer A method of manufacturing a color filter, comprising: a step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern; and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
<22> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to <19>.
<23> An image display device having the color filter according to <19>.
<24> A polymer comprising a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (TP-7), wherein the polymer has a weight average molecular weight of 3000 to 500,000 and a compound having a triarylmethane structure and having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less. A polymer having a content of 20% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer;
なお、本明細書において「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
本明細書において、全固形分とは、着色組成物の全組成から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
本明細書における基(原子団)の表記に於いて、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
本明細書中における「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等を意味する。また、本発明において光とは、活性光線または放射線を意味する。
本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、X線、EUV光などでの露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線での描画も露光に含める。
本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
本明細書におけるモノマーは、オリゴマーおよびポリマーと区別され、重量平均分子量が2,000以下の化合物をいう。
本明細書において、重合性化合物とは、重合性官能基を有する化合物のことをいう。重合性官能基とは、重合反応に関与する基を言う。
本明細書において、化学式中のMeはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を、Prはプロピル基を、Buはブチル基を、Phはフェニル基をそれぞれ示す。
本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
本発明における重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、特に述べない限り、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)測定でのポリスチレン換算値として定義する。 Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
In the present specification, “˜” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
In the description of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
The “radiation” in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like. In the present invention, light means actinic rays or radiation.
Unless otherwise specified, “exposure” in this specification refers not only to exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. This drawing is also included in the exposure.
In this specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate, and “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acrylic and “(meth) acrylic”. ) "Acryloyl" represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
The monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less.
In the present specification, the polymerizable compound refers to a compound having a polymerizable functional group. The polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
In the present specification, Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Pr represents a propyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
The weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight in the present invention are defined as polystyrene conversion values in gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement unless otherwise specified.
本発明の着色組成物は、後述するトリアリールメタン構造を有する繰り返し単位A、および、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位Bを含むポリマーTPと、重合性化合物と、を含み、ポリマーTPは、重量平均分子量が3000~500000であり、トリアリールメタン構造を有する重量平均分子量1500以下の化合物Aの含有量が、ポリマーTPの質量に対して20質量%以下である。
このような構成とすることにより、耐熱性および耐溶剤性に優れた着色組成物を提供することができる。更には、電圧保持率の良好な膜を形成することもできる。このような効果が得られるメカニズムとしては、上記ポリマーTPを用いることで、膜を形成した際において、膜からポリマーTPが溶出し難くなり、耐溶剤性および耐熱性が向上したと考えられる。以下、本発明の着色組成物の各成分について詳細に説明する。 <Coloring composition>
The colored composition of the present invention includes a repeating unit A having a triarylmethane structure, which will be described later, and a polymer TP containing a repeating unit B having a crosslinkable group, and a polymerizable compound. The content of Compound A having a molecular weight of 3000 to 500,000 and having a triarylmethane structure and a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less is 20% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer TP.
By setting it as such a structure, the coloring composition excellent in heat resistance and solvent resistance can be provided. Furthermore, a film having a good voltage holding ratio can be formed. As a mechanism for obtaining such an effect, it is considered that the use of the polymer TP makes it difficult for the polymer TP to elute from the film when the film is formed, and the solvent resistance and heat resistance are improved. Hereinafter, each component of the coloring composition of this invention is demonstrated in detail.
<<<繰り返し単位A>>>
ポリマーTPは、トリアリールメタン構造を有する繰り返し単位Aを含む。
繰り返し単位Aは、下記一般式(A)で表される構造が好ましい。繰り返し単位Aは、ポリマーTPの全繰り返し単位中に1~99質量%含むことが好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下がより好ましく、90質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上がより好ましい。繰り返し単位Aの含有量が上記範囲であれば、色価がより良好となる。
一般式(A)中、X1は、繰り返し単位の主鎖を表し、通常、重合反応で形成される連結基を表し、例えば、(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基、ビニル基、エーテル基を有する化合物由来の主鎖が好ましい。また、主鎖環状のアルキレン基を有する態様も好ましい。なお、2つの*で表された部位で他の繰り返し単位と結合している。
X1としては、公知の重合可能なモノマーから形成される連結基であれば特に制限ないが、特に下記(XX-1)~(XX-24)で表される連結基が好ましく、(XX-1)および(XX-2)で表される(メタ)アクリル系連結鎖、(XX-10)~(XX-17)で表されるスチレン系連結鎖、(XX-18)および(XX-19)、並びに、(XX-24)で表されるビニル系連結鎖から選択されることがより好ましく、(XX-1)および(XX-2)で表される(メタ)アクリル系連結鎖、(XX-10)~(XX-17)で表されるスチレン系連結鎖、(XX-24)で表されるビニル系連結鎖から選択されることがさらに好ましく、(XX-1)および(XX-2)で表される(メタ)アクリル系連結鎖および(XX-11)で表されるスチレン系連結鎖が特に好ましい。
(XX-1)~(XX-24)中、*で示された部位でL1と連結していることを表す。Meはメチル基を表す。また、(XX-18)および(XX-19)中のRは、水素原子、炭素数1~5のアルキル基またはフェニル基を表す。 << Polymer TP >>
<<< Repeating unit A >>>
The polymer TP includes a repeating unit A having a triarylmethane structure.
The repeating unit A preferably has a structure represented by the following general formula (A). The repeating unit A is preferably contained at 1 to 99% by mass in all the repeating units of the polymer TP. The upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less, and still more preferably 90% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more. If content of the repeating unit A is the said range, color value will become more favorable.
In the general formula (A), X 1 represents a main chain of repeating units, usually represents a linking group formed by polymerization reaction, for example, having a (meth) acrylic group, styrene group, a vinyl group, an ether group A main chain derived from a compound is preferred. An embodiment having a main chain cyclic alkylene group is also preferred. In addition, it has couple | bonded with the other repeating unit in the site | part represented by two *.
X 1 is not particularly limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer, but is particularly preferably a linking group represented by the following (XX-1) to (XX-24), (XX— 1) (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-2), styrene linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17), (XX-18) and (XX-19) ) And a vinyl-based linking chain represented by (XX-24), and (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-1) and (XX-2), ( More preferably selected from styrene-based linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17) and vinyl-based linking chains represented by (XX-24), and (XX-1) and (XX- (Meth) acrylic connecting chain represented by 2) and (XX-11) In styrene linking chain represented are especially preferred.
In (XX-1) to (XX-24), this represents that L1 is linked at the site indicated by *. Me represents a methyl group. R in (XX-18) and (XX-19) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group.
アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましい。上限は、25以下がより好ましく、20以下が更に好ましい。下限は、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
L1は、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-NH-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましく、アルキレン基、アリーレン基および、これらと、-O-、-COO-および-OCO-から選ばれる1種以上とを組み合わせてなる2価の基がより好ましく、アルキレン基、または、アルキレン基同士が-O-、-COO-および-OCO-から選ばれる1種以上を介して連結されている連結基がさらに好ましい。
L1は、X1とDyeIとをつなぐ鎖を構成する原子の数は、1以上であることが好ましく、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましく、5以上が特に好ましい。上限は、例えば、20以下が好ましい。この態様によれば、ポリマーTPの合成の際に、未反応または、反応が不十分な低分子のトリアリールメタン化合物を効果的に抑制できる。例えば、以下の場合、X1とDyeIとをつなぐ鎖を構成する原子の数は10個である。なお、構造式に併記した数字は、X1とDyeIとをつなぐ鎖を構成する原子の数である。 When L 1 represents a divalent linking group, an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heterocyclic group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —COO —, —OCO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms. The upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, and still more preferably 20 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12.
L 1 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, —NH—, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO— or a linking group in which two or more thereof are combined, and includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, and , —O—, —COO—, and a divalent group formed by combining one or more selected from —OCO— are more preferable, and an alkylene group or alkylene groups are —O—, —COO—, and —OCO. More preferred is a linking group linked via one or more selected from-.
In L 1 , the number of atoms constituting the chain connecting X 1 and Dye I is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, further preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more. The upper limit is preferably 20 or less, for example. According to this aspect, in the synthesis of the polymer TP, a low-molecular triarylmethane compound that is unreacted or insufficiently reacted can be effectively suppressed. For example, in the following case, the number of atoms constituting the chain connecting X 1 and Dye I is ten. The numbers written in the structural formula are the number of atoms constituting the chain connecting X 1 and DyeI.
L1が2価の連結基を表す場合、L1は、一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中のRtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71及びRtp72のいずれかと結合しており、Rtp71またはRtp72と結合していることが好ましい。 When L 1 represents a single bond, X 1 is bonded to any one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 in the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), and Rtp 71 or Rtp 72 It is preferable that it is couple | bonded with.
When L 1 represents a divalent linking group, L 1 is bonded to any one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 in the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), and Rtp 71 or Rtp 72 is preferably bonded.
次に、繰り返し単位Aが有するトリアリールメタン構造について説明する。
繰り返し単位Aは、一般式(TP1)、および、一般式(TP2)から選ばれるトリアリールメタン構造を有する。
Next, the triarylmethane structure that the repeating unit A has will be described.
The repeating unit A has a triarylmethane structure selected from the general formula (TP1) and the general formula (TP2).
アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。アリール基が有していてもよい置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。 The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. The alkyl group is preferably unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状が好ましい。アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。
Rtp71およびRtp72は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子またはアルキル基が好ましい。
アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~8がより好ましく、1~6がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよく、環状が好ましい。アルキル基は、置換されていてもよい。アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。
アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。アリール基が有していてもよい置換基は、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。 In General Formula (TP1), Rtp 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , preferably a hydrogen atom or NRtp 71 Rtp 72 , and more preferably NRtp 71 Rtp 72 .
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms.
Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic. The alkyl group may be substituted. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
Rtp9は、アリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~12のアリール基がより好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。
Rtp11は、アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~3のアルキル基がさらに好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましく、直鎖状がより好ましい。 In General Formula (TP2), Rtp 9 and Rtp 11 each independently represent a substituent, and the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later can be used.
Rtp 9 is preferably an aryl group, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group.
Rtp 11 is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
アニオンとしては、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンが好ましく、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンがより好ましく、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンおよびトリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンが更に好ましい。
具体的には、Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71およびRtp72の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で置換された構造が挙げられる。
一般式(P)
As the anion, —SO 3 − , —COO − , —PO 4 − , bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion are preferable, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anion and tris (sulfonyl) methide anion And tetraarylborate anions are more preferable, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anions and tris (sulfonyl) methide anions are more preferable.
Specifically, a structure in which at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 is substituted with the general formula (P) can be mentioned.
General formula (P)
-NR10-において、R10は、水素原子または炭素数1~5のアルキル基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
フッ素原子を含むアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。これらのアルキレン基は、パーフルオロアルキレン基がより好ましい。フッ素置換アルキレン基の具体例としては、ジフルオロメチレン基、テトラフルオロエチレン基、ヘキサフルオロプロピレン基などが挙げられる。
フッ素原子を含むアリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアリーレン基の具体例としては、テトラフルオロフェニレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-1-ナフチレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-2-ナフチレン基などが挙げられる。 In general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group preferably represents —NR 10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom, an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or a combination thereof. In particular, a group consisting of a combination of —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom, a group consisting of a combination of —O— and an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or —NR 10 — and —SO A group consisting of a combination of 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferred.
In —NR 10 —, R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and still more preferably 1 to 3. These alkylene groups are more preferably perfluoroalkylene groups. Specific examples of the fluorine-substituted alkylene group include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
The number of carbon atoms of the arylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10. Specific examples of the arylene group containing a fluorine atom include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group, and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
一般式(A1)
一般式(A2)
General formula (A1)
General formula (A2)
一般式(A2)で表される構造を含む基は、一般式(A2)中、R3~R5の少なくともいずれかの末端に、フッ素置換アルキル基を有することが好ましく、R3~R5の少なくともいずれかが直接フッ素置換アルキル基と結合していることがより好ましい。特に、R3~R5の少なくとも2つの末端に、フッ素置換アルキル基を有することが好ましく、R3~R5の少なくとも2つが直接フッ素置換アルキル基と結合していることがより好ましい。フッ素置換アルキル基は、一般式(A1)で表される構造を含む基で説明したものと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
その他、X1の具体例としては、後述する対アニオンAが挙げられる。この場合、対アニオンAを構成するいずれか1つの水素原子またはハロゲン原子が一般式(P)中のLと結合している。 Group containing a structure represented by the general formula (A1), in the general formula (A1), to one end of R 1 and R 2, preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group, one of R 1 and R 2 More preferably, is directly bonded to a fluorine-substituted alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms in the fluorine-substituted alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, still more preferably 1 to 3, still more preferably 1 or 2, and particularly preferably 1. These alkyl groups are more preferably perfluoroalkyl groups. As a specific example of the fluorine-substituted alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group is preferable.
The group containing the structure represented by the general formula (A2) preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group at least at any terminal of R 3 to R 5 in the general formula (A2), and R 3 to R 5 More preferably, at least one of the above is directly bonded to the fluorine-substituted alkyl group. In particular, at least two ends of R 3 ~ R 5, preferably has a fluorine-substituted alkyl group, and more preferably at least two of R 3 ~ R 5 are attached directly to a fluorine-substituted alkyl group. A fluorine-substituted alkyl group is synonymous with what was demonstrated by group containing the structure represented by general formula (A1), and its preferable range is also the same.
Other specific examples of X 1 include counter anion A described later. In this case, any one hydrogen atom or halogen atom constituting the counter anion A is bonded to L in the general formula (P).
一般式(TP1)および一般式(TP2)において、Xが存在している場合は、アニオンは、トリアリールメタン構造の分子外に有していることを意味する。また、アニオンが、トリアリールメタン構造の分子外に有するとは、トリアリールメタン構造とアニオンが共有結合を介して結合せず、別化合物として存在している場合をいう。以下、トリアリールメタン構造の分子外のアニオンを対アニオンともいう。 In general formula (TP1) and general formula (TP2), X represents an anion. In the general formula (TP1) and general formula (TP2), X may or may not exist.
In the general formulas (TP1) and (TP2), when X is present, it means that the anion is outside the molecule of the triarylmethane structure. The term “an anion outside the molecule of the triarylmethane structure” means that the triarylmethane structure and the anion are not bonded via a covalent bond but exist as a separate compound. Hereinafter, an anion outside the molecule of the triarylmethane structure is also referred to as a counter anion.
ボレートアニオンとしては、B(R10)4-で表される基であり、R10は、フッ素原子、シアノ基、フッ化アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基等が例示される。 Examples of the counter anion include fluorine anion, chlorine anion, bromine anion, iodine anion, cyanide ion, perchlorate anion, borate anion (BF 4− etc.), PF 6− and SbF 6− .
The borate anion is a group represented by B (R 10 ) 4− , and R 10 is exemplified by a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a fluorinated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, and the like.
一般式(A1)中、R1およびR2の少なくとも1つが-SO2-を表すことが好ましく、R1およびR2の両方が-SO2-を表すことがより好ましい。 General formula (A1)
In formula (A1), at least one of R 1 and R 2 -SO 2 - preferably represents an, both R 1 and R 2 are -SO 2 - and more preferably represents.
一般式(A1-1)
一般式(A1-1)中、R1およびR2は、一般式(A1)中のR1およびR2と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
X1がアルキレン基を表す場合、アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましい。X1がアリーレン基を表す場合、アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6がさらに好ましい。X1が置換基を有する場合、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
X2は、アルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表し、アルキレン基が好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましく、1が特に好ましい。X2が置換基を有する場合、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。 The general formula (A1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (A1-1).
Formula (A1-1)
In formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 of the general formula (A1) in the same meaning as R 1 and R 2, and preferred ranges are also the same.
When X 1 represents an alkylene group, the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. When X 1 represents an arylene group, the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6. When X 1 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
X 2 represents an alkylene group or an arylene group, and an alkylene group is preferable. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1. When X 2 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
一般式(A2)中、R3~R5の少なくとも1つが-SO2-を表すことが好ましく、R3~R5の少なくとも2つが-SO2-を表すことがより好ましい。 General formula (A2)
Preferably representing the at least two R 3 ~ R 5 is -SO 2 - - In formula (A2), at least one of R 3 ~ R 5 -SO 2 more preferably represents.
また、上記一般式(A1)で表される基を含む化合物の具体例としては、R1がハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアルキル基、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアリール基と結合している化合物が例示される。
また、上記一般式(A2)で表される基を含む化合物の具体例としては、R4およびR5が、それぞれ、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアルキル基、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいアリール基である場合が例示される。 Specific examples in the case where the counter anion is a compound having an anion moiety include R—SO 3 − , R—COO — or R—PO 4 — , wherein R is substituted with a halogen atom or a halogen atom. Examples of the alkyl group which may be substituted and an aryl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom are also exemplified.
Specific examples of the compound containing the group represented by the general formula (A1) include R 1 as a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, and an aryl which may be substituted with a halogen atom. Examples are compounds bonded to a group.
As specific examples of the compound containing the group represented by the general formula (A2), R 4 and R 5 are each substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, or a halogen atom. The case where it is the aryl group which may be made is illustrated.
ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンを含む化合物は、モノマーであってもよいし、ポリマーであってもよい。ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンを含む化合物は、下記一般式(AN1)で表されることが好ましい。
一般式(AN1)
R1は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状または環状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。アルキル基は、フッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基が好ましい。フッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基の炭素数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよい。特に、パーフルオロアルキル基が好ましく、パーフルオロメチル基がより好ましい。
アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。アリール基は、フッ素原子で置換されたアリール基が好ましい。
R2は、R1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンを含む化合物の具体例としては、ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドアニオンが好ましい。このような構成とすることにより、耐熱性をより向上させることができる。 When the counter anion is a compound having an anion moiety, the counter anion is preferably a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a compound containing a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, or a compound containing a sulfonate anion.
The compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion may be a monomer or a polymer. The compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion is preferably represented by the following general formula (AN1).
General formula (AN1)
R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 6, and more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may have a substituent. In particular, a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group is preferably an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
R 2 has the same meaning as R 1 , and the preferred range is also the same.
As a specific example of the compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide anion is preferable. By setting it as such a structure, heat resistance can be improved more.
一般式(AN2)
R3は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状または環状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。アルキル基は、フッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基が好ましい。フッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基の炭素数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよい。特に、パーフルオロアルキル基が好ましく、パーフルオロメチル基がより好ましい。
アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。アリール基は、フッ素原子で置換されたアリール基が好ましい。
R4は、R3と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
R5は、R3と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンを含む化合物の具体例としては、トリス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)メチドアニオンが好ましい。 The compound containing a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (AN2).
General formula (AN2)
R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 6, and more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may have a substituent. In particular, a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group is preferably an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
R 4 has the same meaning as R 3 , and the preferred range is also the same.
R 5 has the same meaning as R 3 , and the preferred range is also the same.
As a specific example of the compound containing a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, a tris (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) methide anion is preferable.
一般式(AN3)
R-SO3 -
一般式(AN3)中、Rは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。Rがアルキル基を表す場合、フッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。特に、パーフルオロアルキル基が好ましく、パーフルオロメチル基がより好ましい。
Rがアリール基を表す場合、フッ素原子で置換されたアリール基が好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
スルホン酸アニオンを含む化合物の具体例としては、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸アニオンが好ましい。 The compound containing a sulfonate anion is preferably represented by the following general formula (AN3).
General formula (AN3)
R-SO 3 -
In General Formula (AN3), R represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. When R represents an alkyl group, an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. In particular, a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable.
When R represents an aryl group, an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
As a specific example of the compound containing a sulfonate anion, a trifluoromethanesulfonate anion is preferable.
架橋性基としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の重合性基が挙げられる。具体的には、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチリル基、ビニル基、環状エーテル基および-C-O-Rで表される基(ただし、Rは水素原子または炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す)が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチリル基、ビニル基および環状エーテル基から選択される少なくとも1種が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチリル基およびビニル基から選択される1種がより好ましく、(メタ)アクリロイル基またはスチリル基がさらに好ましい。
架橋性基を含む化合物中の架橋性基の数は、1~3が好ましく、1がより好ましい。 Next, the case where the counter anion is a compound containing a crosslinkable group will be described.
Examples of the crosslinkable group include known polymerizable groups that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat. Specifically, a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group, a vinyl group, a cyclic ether group, and a group represented by —C—O—R (where R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms). And at least one selected from a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group, a vinyl group and a cyclic ether group is preferable, and one selected from a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group and a vinyl group is more preferable A (meth) acryloyl group or a styryl group is more preferable.
The number of crosslinkable groups in the compound containing a crosslinkable group is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1.
対アニオン架橋性基を含む化合物である場合の具体例は、下記一般式(B)で表されることが好ましい。 Further, the crosslinkable group and the counter anion may be directly bonded or may be bonded via a linking group, but are preferably bonded via a linking group.
A specific example in the case of a compound containing a counter anion crosslinkable group is preferably represented by the following general formula (B).
一般式(B)中、Pは架橋性基を表し、上述した架橋性基が挙げられる。
一般式(B)中、Lが2価の連結基を表す場合、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、炭素数6~30のアリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO-、-NR-、-CONR-、-OC-、-SO2-およびこれらを2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。
特に、連結基は、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基、-NH-、-CO-、-O-および-SO2-を2以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。 General formula (B)
In general formula (B), P represents a crosslinkable group, and examples thereof include the crosslinkable groups described above.
In the general formula (B), when L represents a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O— , —S—, —C (═O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO 2 — and a combination of two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
In particular, the linking group is preferably a linking group in which two or more alkylene groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, arylene groups having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —NH—, —CO—, —O— and —SO 2 — are combined.
アニオン多量体は、繰り返し単位の側鎖にアニオン部を有していてもよいし、繰り返し単位の主鎖にアニオン部を有していてもよし、主鎖および側鎖の両方にアニオン部を有していてもよい。
アニオン多量体は、下記一般式(C)および/または下記一般式(D)で表されることが好ましい。 Next, the case of a polymer containing a repeating unit having an anion moiety (hereinafter also referred to as an anion multimer) will be described.
The anion multimer may have an anion part in the side chain of the repeating unit, an anion part in the main chain of the repeating unit, or an anion part in both the main chain and the side chain. You may do it.
The anion multimer is preferably represented by the following general formula (C) and / or the following general formula (D).
L1は、単結合、または、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基、-NH-、-CO2-、-O-および-SO2-を2以上組み合わせた2価の連結基がより好ましい。 When L 1 represents a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, — COO—, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OCO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
L 1 is a single bond or a combination of 2 or more of an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —NH—, —CO 2 —, —O—, and —SO 2 —. A valent linking group is more preferred.
一般式(AN4)
X1およびL1は上記一般式(C)中のX1およびL1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
R1は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状または環状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。アルキル基は、フッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基が好ましい。フッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基の炭素数は、1~6が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよい。特に、パーフルオロアルキル基が好ましく、パーフルオロメチル基がより好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~18が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。アリール基は、フッ素原子で置換されたアリール基が好ましい。 The anion multimer is preferably represented by the following general formula (AN4).
General formula (AN4)
X 1 and L 1 have the same meanings as X 1 and L 1 in the above the general formula (C), and preferred ranges are also the same.
R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 6, and more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may have a substituent. In particular, a perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a perfluoromethyl group is more preferable. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group is preferably an aryl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
L2は、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基(特にフェニレン基)が好ましい。炭素数6~30のアリーレン基は、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
L3は、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基(特にフェニレン基)と-O-との組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、少なくとも1種の炭素数6~12のアリーレン基がフッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。 In the general formula (D), when L 2 and L 3 represent a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH— , —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OCO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
L 2 is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group). The arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
L 3 is preferably a group composed of a combination of an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group) and —O—, and at least one arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom. It is preferable.
また、アニオン多量体は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含有してもよい。酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する場合、その量は、全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、例えば、10~50モルが好ましく、10~30モルがより好ましい。 The anionic multimer may contain a repeating unit having a polymerizable group. When the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is contained, the amount thereof is preferably, for example, 10 to 50 mol, and more preferably 10 to 30 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units.
The anionic multimer may contain a repeating unit having an acid group. When the repeating unit having an acid group is contained, the amount thereof is, for example, preferably 10 to 50 mol, more preferably 10 to 30 mol, relative to 100 mol of all repeating units.
アニオン多量体に含まれるハロゲンイオン含有量としては、10~3000ppm以下が好ましく、10~2000ppmがより好ましく、10~1000ppmがさらに好ましい。
アニオン多量体の具体例としては、特開2015-030742号公報の段落番号0034~0035に記載された構造が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。 When forming an anionic multimer, a chain transfer agent may be added. The chain transfer agent is preferably an alkyl mercaptan, preferably an alkyl mercaptan having 4 or more carbon atoms, an alkyl mercaptan substituted with a carboxy group, an ether group or an ester group.
The halogen ion content contained in the anionic multimer is preferably 10 to 3000 ppm, more preferably 10 to 2000 ppm, and even more preferably 10 to 1000 ppm.
Specific examples of the anion multimer include the structures described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0035 of JP-A-2015-030742, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
一般式(TP3)中、Rtp22は、炭素数6~10のアリール基を表す。Rtp22は、少なくともオルト位に置換基を有するアリール基が好ましい。アリール基が有していてもよい置換基は、後述する置換基群Aの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられ、炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましい。このような構成とすることにより、耐熱性をより向上させることができる。
Rtp71は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよく、環状が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~12が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。
Rtp21、Rtp22及びRtp71のいずれかが繰り返し単位との結合部位を表し、Rtp71が繰り返し単位との結合部位であることが好ましい。 In general formula (TP3), Rtp 21 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include the substituents mentioned in the section of Substituent Group A described later. By setting it as such a structure, light resistance can be improved more.
In General Formula (TP3), Rtp 22 represents an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Rtp 22 is preferably an aryl group having a substituent at least in the ortho position. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include those described in the section of Substituent Group A described later, and an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable. By setting it as such a structure, heat resistance can be improved more.
Rtp 71 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
Any of Rtp 21 , Rtp 22 and Rtp 71 represents a binding site with the repeating unit, and Rtp 71 is preferably a binding site with the repeating unit.
Rtp21、Rtp22の詳細については、一般式(TP3)のRtp21、Rtp22と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 The triarylmethane structure is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP3A).
For more information about rtp 21, rtp 22, the general formula (TP3) have the same meanings as rtp 21, rtp 22 of, and preferred ranges are also the same.
置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、シリルオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アミノ基(アルキルアミノ基、アニリノ基を含む)、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、スルファモイル基、アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基などが挙げられる。置換基群Aの詳細については、特開2015-034966号公報の段落番号0174~0185の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。 Substituent group A:
Substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heterocyclic groups, cyano groups, hydroxy groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, silyloxy groups, heterocyclic oxy groups, acyloxy groups. Carbamoyloxy group, amino group (including alkylamino group and anilino group), acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group, Mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, alkyl or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl or arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group A carbamoyl group, an aryl or heterocyclic azo group, an imido group, a phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, and a silyl group. For details of the substituent group A, the description of paragraph numbers 0174 to 0185 in JP-A-2015-034966 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
繰り返し単位Aは、下記一般式(TP3-1)で表されることが好ましい。
The repeating unit A is preferably represented by the following general formula (TP3-1).
Rtp71aは、アルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表し、アルキレン基が好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよく、環状が好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましい。アリーレン基の炭素数は6~12が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。無置換が好ましい。置換基としては、上述した置換基群Aで説明した置換基が挙げられる。
L1は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。L1は上述した一般式(A)中のL1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
一般式(TP3-1)において、「-Rtp71a-L1-」部分における、繰り返し単位Aの主鎖と、トリアリールメタン構造のRtp71aが結合する窒素原子とをつなぐ鎖を構成する原子の数は、1以上であることが好ましく、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましく、5以上が特に好ましい。上限は、例えば、20以下が好ましい。この態様によれば、ポリマーTPの合成の際に、未反応または、反応が不十分な低分子のトリアリールメタン化合物を抑制できる。その結果、耐熱性および耐溶剤性を向上することができる。 Rtp 21 and Rtp 22 are synonymous with Rtp 21 and Rtp 22 in the general formula (TP3) described above, and preferred ranges thereof are also the same.
Rtp 71a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group, and an alkylene group is preferable. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Unsubstituted is preferred. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the substituent group A described above.
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. L 1 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (A) described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
In the general formula (TP3-1), in the “—Rtp 71a -L 1 —” portion, the atom constituting the chain connecting the main chain of the repeating unit A and the nitrogen atom to which Rtp 71a of the triarylmethane structure is bonded. The number is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more. The upper limit is preferably 20 or less, for example. According to this aspect, in the synthesis of the polymer TP, it is possible to suppress a low-molecular triarylmethane compound that has not reacted or is insufficiently reacted. As a result, heat resistance and solvent resistance can be improved.
Rtp21は、それぞれ独立して炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~4が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
Rtp24は、それぞれ独立して炭素数1または2のアルキル基が好ましい。
Rtp25が炭素数1~3のアルキル基を表す場合、アルキル基の炭素数は、1または2が好ましい。
Rtp71aは、上述した一般式(TP3-1)中のRtp71aと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
L1は、上述した一般式(TP3-1)中のL1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In general formula (TP3-2), Rtp 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, Rtp 24 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and Rtp 25 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, Rtp 71a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group; Rtp 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group; L 1 represents a single bond or X represents an anion, or X does not exist and at least one of Rtp 21 and Rtp 24 includes an anion.
Rtp 21 is preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
Rtp 24 is preferably independently an alkyl group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
When Rtp 25 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, the alkyl group preferably has 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
Rtp 71a has the same meaning as rtp 71a in general formula (TP3-1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
L 1 has the same meaning as L 1 in formula (TP3-1) described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
ポリマーTPは、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位Bを含む。繰り返し単位Bは、ポリマーTPの全繰り返し単位中に1~99質量%含むことが好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下がより好ましく、90質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上がより好ましく、3質量%以上がさらに好ましい。繰り返し単位Bの含有量が上記範囲であれば、耐熱性および耐溶剤性が特に優れる。 <<< Repeating unit B >>>
The polymer TP includes a repeating unit B having a crosslinkable group. The repeating unit B is preferably contained in an amount of 1 to 99% by mass in all the repeating units of the polymer TP. The upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less, and still more preferably 90% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2% by mass or more, and further preferably 3% by mass or more. When the content of the repeating unit B is within the above range, the heat resistance and the solvent resistance are particularly excellent.
架橋性基は、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、オキサゾリン基、-C-O-Rで表される基(ただし、Rは水素原子または炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す)、カーボネート基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、および、ビニル基から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましく、エポキシ基またはオキセタニル基がより好ましい。
ポリマーTPが有する架橋性基は、ポリマーTPが有する架橋基同士が反応したり、アルカリ可溶性バインダーや架橋剤などが有する架橋性基と反応する。 As the crosslinkable group, a known crosslinkable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, acid, or heat can be used. For example, a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group , A group represented by —C—O—R (wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), a carbonate group, and the like. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and a dicyclopentenyl group. As the carbonate group, a cyclocarbonate group is preferred.
The crosslinkable group includes an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an oxazoline group, a group represented by —C—O—R (where R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), a carbonate group, ) At least one selected from an acryloyl group and a vinyl group is preferable, and an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group is more preferable.
The crosslinkable group possessed by the polymer TP reacts with the crosslinkable groups possessed by the polymer TP, or reacts with the crosslinkable groups possessed by an alkali-soluble binder or a crosslinking agent.
ポリマーTPは、上記繰り返し単位A、B以外の他の繰り返し単位を更に有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルおよび(メタ)アクリル酸アミドの少なくとも1種に由来する繰り返し単位が例示される。
具体的には、酸基を有する繰り返し単位が挙げられる。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基が例示され、カルボキシ基が好ましい。ポリマーTPが酸基を有する繰り返し単位をさらに有することにより、着色組成物の現像性能をより向上させることができる。ポリマーTPが、酸基を有する繰り返し単位をさらに含有する場合、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する繰り返し単位の割合は、ポリマーTPの全繰り返し単位中に、例えば、10~80質量%含むことが好ましく、10~60質量%がより好ましい。 <<< other repeating units >>>
The polymer TP may further have a repeating unit other than the above repeating units A and B. Examples of other repeating units include repeating units derived from at least one of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, and (meth) acrylic acid amide.
Specific examples include a repeating unit having an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable. When the polymer TP further has a repeating unit having an acid group, the developing performance of the colored composition can be further improved. When the polymer TP further contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the ratio of the repeating unit containing the repeating unit having an acid group may be, for example, 10 to 80% by mass in all the repeating units of the polymer TP. Preferably, 10 to 60% by mass is more preferable.
ポリマーTPの数平均分子量は、2000~500000が好ましい。下限は、2500以上が好ましく、3000以上がより好ましく、4000以上が更に好ましく、5000以上が特に好ましい。上限は、100000以下が好ましく、70000以下がより好ましく、50000以下が特に好ましい。
ポリマーTPの分散度(重量平均分子量/数平均分子量)は、1.0~5.0が好ましい。上限は、4.0以下が好ましく、3.5以下がより好ましく、2.0以下が特に好ましい。
ポリマーTPの重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフ(GPC)測定でのポリスチレン換算値であり、具体的には、後述する実施例に記載の方法で測定した値である。 In the present invention, the weight average molecular weight of the polymer TP is preferably 3000 to 500,000. The lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more, still more preferably 7000 or more, and particularly preferably 10,000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 200000 or less, more preferably 100000 or less, and particularly preferably 50000 or less. That is, the weight average molecular weight of the polymer TP is particularly preferably 10,000 to 50,000. Heat resistance and solvent resistance are good by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer TP to the above-described range. Furthermore, the voltage characteristics can be improved.
The number average molecular weight of the polymer TP is preferably 2,000 to 500,000. The lower limit is preferably 2500 or more, more preferably 3000 or more, still more preferably 4000 or more, and particularly preferably 5000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 70000 or less, and particularly preferably 50000 or less.
The dispersity (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight) of the polymer TP is preferably 1.0 to 5.0. The upper limit is preferably 4.0 or less, more preferably 3.5 or less, and particularly preferably 2.0 or less.
The weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight of the polymer TP are polystyrene-converted values in gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) measurement, and specifically are values measured by the method described in the examples described later.
化合物Aの含有量を20質量%以下とすることで、膜からのポリマーTPが溶出することを効果的に抑制でき、その結果、膜の耐溶剤性や耐熱性を向上できる。
化合物Aは、トリアリールメタン構造を有する化合物であって、具体的には、トリアリールメタン構造を有する原料モノマー等の未反応物や、重合性基を有さない原料モノマー含有の不純物などを意味する。
ポリマーTP中の化合物Aの含有量は、ポリマーTPのGPC測定において紫外光で検出することで、測定できる。
本発明において、ポリマーTP中の化合物Aの含有量は、HLC-8020GPC(東ソー(株)製)にて、TSKgel α―M(東ソー(株)製、7.8mm(内径)×30cm)を2本直列につないだものをカラムとし、測定条件は、試料濃度を0.35質量%のN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)溶液、流速を0.3mL/min、サンプル注入量を10μL、測定温度を40℃とし、紫外線検出器を用いて行った値である。 In the present invention, in the polymer TP, the content of the compound A having a triarylmethane structure and a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less is 20% by mass or less, preferably 10% by mass or less, preferably 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the polymer TP. % Or less is more preferable, 1% by mass or less is particularly preferable, and it can be substantially not contained. Note that substantially not containing means that, for example, the content of compound A is preferably 0.1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.01% by mass or less, and not more than 0.1% by mass with respect to the mass of the polymer TP. preferable.
By setting the content of Compound A to 20% by mass or less, it is possible to effectively suppress the elution of the polymer TP from the film, and as a result, it is possible to improve the solvent resistance and heat resistance of the film.
Compound A is a compound having a triarylmethane structure, and specifically means an unreacted material such as a raw material monomer having a triarylmethane structure, or a raw material monomer-containing impurity having no polymerizable group. To do.
The content of Compound A in the polymer TP can be measured by detecting with ultraviolet light in the GPC measurement of the polymer TP.
In the present invention, the content of Compound A in the polymer TP is 2 for TSKgel α-M (Tosoh Corp., 7.8 mm (inner diameter) × 30 cm) using HLC-8020GPC (Tosoh Corp.). The column is connected in series, and the measurement conditions are N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) solution with a sample concentration of 0.35% by mass, a flow rate of 0.3 mL / min, and a sample injection amount of 10 μL. It is a value obtained by setting the temperature to 40 ° C. and using an ultraviolet detector.
R2は炭素数1~10の炭化水素基を表す。炭化水素基は、直鎖状、分岐状または環状であってもよく、直鎖状または環状が好ましい。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく、アルキル基が好ましい。特に、R2は、炭素数5~10の環状のアルキル基、炭素数1~8の直鎖状のアルキル基または炭素数3~8の分岐状のアルキル基が好ましい。環状のアルキル基の炭素数は、6~8が好ましく、6がより好ましい。直鎖状のアルキル基の炭素数は1または2が好ましく、1がより好ましい。分岐状のアルキル基の炭素数は3~8が好ましい。炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としてはヒドロキシ基が好ましい。炭化水素基が置換基を有する場合の例としては、ヒドロキシエチル基が好ましい。
R3は架橋性基を表す。架橋性基は、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、オキサゾリン基、-C-O-Rで表される基(ただし、Rは水素原子または炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す)およびカーボネート基から選ばれる少なくとも1種が挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、ジシクロペンテニル基などが挙げられる。
R4は水素原子もしくはメチル基を表し、メチル基であることが好ましい。
R1aは、アルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表し、アルキレン基が好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状および環状のいずれであってもよく、環状が好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましい。アリーレン基の炭素数は6~12が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。無置換が好ましい。置換基としては、上述した置換基群Aで説明した置換基が挙げられる。
L11は、単結合、または、炭素数1~30の2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基は、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基、これらと-CO-、-OCO-、-O-、-NH-および-SO2-から選ばれる1種とを組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。2価の連結基は、アルキレン基、または、アルキレン基、または、アルキレン基同士が-O-、-COO-および-OCO-から選ばれる1種以上を介して連結されている連結基が好ましい。
L12およびL13は、単結合、または、炭素数1~30の2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基は、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基、これらと-CO-、-OCO-、-O-、-NH-および-SO2-から選ばれる1種とを組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基群Aが挙げられる。なかでもヒドロキシ基が好ましい。
一般式(TP-7)において、「-L11-R1a-」部分における、繰り返し単位Aの主鎖と、トリアリールメタン構造のR1aが結合する窒素原子とをつなぐ鎖を構成する原子の数は、1以上であることが好ましく、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更に好ましく、5以上が特に好ましい。上限は、例えば、20以下が好ましい。 In general formula (TP-7), each R 1 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably linear.
R 2 represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably linear or cyclic. The hydrocarbon group is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and is preferably an alkyl group. In particular, R 2 is preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms in the cyclic alkyl group is preferably 6 to 8, and more preferably 6. The linear alkyl group preferably has 1 or 2 carbon atoms, more preferably 1. The branched alkyl group preferably has 3 to 8 carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent, and the substituent is preferably a hydroxy group. As an example of the case where the hydrocarbon group has a substituent, a hydroxyethyl group is preferable.
R 3 represents a crosslinkable group. The crosslinkable group includes an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an oxazoline group, and a group represented by —C—O—R (where R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms). And at least one selected from carbonate groups. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and a dicyclopentenyl group.
R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a methyl group.
R 1a represents an alkylene group or an arylene group, and an alkylene group is preferred. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is preferably cyclic. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Unsubstituted is preferred. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the substituent group A described above.
L 11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. The divalent linking group is selected from an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and —CO—, —OCO—, —O—, —NH— and —SO 2 —. Group which combines 1 type is mentioned. The divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an alkylene group, or a linking group in which the alkylene groups are linked via one or more selected from —O—, —COO—, and —OCO—.
L 12 and L 13 each represent a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. The divalent linking group is selected from an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and —CO—, —OCO—, —O—, —NH— and —SO 2 —. Group which combines 1 type is mentioned. The alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the substituent group A described above. Of these, a hydroxy group is preferred.
In the general formula (TP-7), in the “—L 11 —R 1a —” moiety, the atoms constituting the chain connecting the main chain of the repeating unit A and the nitrogen atom to which R 1a of the triarylmethane structure is bonded. The number is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 3 or more, and particularly preferably 5 or more. The upper limit is preferably 20 or less, for example.
ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンを含む化合物は、単量体であってもよいし、多量体であってもよい。ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンを含む化合物は、上述した一般式(AN1)で表される化合物が好ましい。
トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンを含む化合物は、上述した一般式(AN2)で表される化合物が好ましい。
スルホン酸アニオンを含む化合物は、上述した一般式(AN3)で表される化合物が好ましい。 In the general formula (TP-7), X represents a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion or a sulfonate anion, and a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion is preferred.
The compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion may be a monomer or a multimer. The compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (AN1) described above.
The compound containing a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (AN2) described above.
The compound containing a sulfonate anion is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (AN3) described above.
Although the specific example of polymer TP is shown to this invention below, it is not limited to these.
本発明のポリマーTPは、一般式(TP1a)、および、一般式(TP2a)から選ばれる少なくとも1種で表されるトリアリールメタン構造を有するトリアリールメタンモノマーと、架橋性基を有するモノマーとを少なくとも含む原料モノマーを重合して製造できる。原料モノマーは、更に酸基を有するモノマーや、上述した他の繰り返し単位で説明した官能基を有するモノマーを含んでいてもよい。
The polymer TP of the present invention comprises a triarylmethane monomer having a triarylmethane structure represented by at least one selected from general formula (TP1a) and general formula (TP2a), and a monomer having a crosslinkable group. It can be produced by polymerizing at least raw material monomers. The raw material monomer may further include a monomer having an acid group and a monomer having a functional group described in the above-described other repeating unit.
一般式(TP1a)および(TP2a)において、Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71およびRtp72の少なくとも一つが重合性基を有する。Rtp71およびRtp72の少なくとも一つが重合性基を有することが好ましい。重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチリル基等が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。 Rtp 1 ~ Rtp 11, Rtp 71 , Rtp 72 and X in general formula (TP1a), and, rtp 1 ~ rtp 11 of the general formula (TP2a), rtp 71, have the same meanings as rtp 72 and X, the preferred range is also It is the same.
In the general formulas (TP1a) and (TP2a), at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 11 , Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a polymerizable group. It is preferable that at least one of Rtp 71 and Rtp 72 has a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, and a styryl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
原料モノマーの反応溶液の調製に用いる溶剤としては、後述する着色組成物が含有してもよい溶剤が挙げられる。 The polymerization is preferably performed in a solution containing the above-mentioned raw material monomers in a total amount of 30 to 60% by mass. The content of the raw material monomer in the solution is more preferably 35 to 55% by mass, still more preferably 40 to 55% by mass. If content of a raw material monomer is the said range, it can make it easy to advance superposition | polymerization of a triarylmethane monomer. As a result, the content of compound A in the polymer TP can be reduced.
Examples of the solvent used in the preparation of the raw material monomer reaction solution include solvents that may be contained in the coloring composition described below.
重合を終えたのち、精製処理を行ってもよい。これにより、化合物Aの含有量を低減できる。 A chain transfer agent may be added during the polymerization. As the chain transfer agent, an alkyl mercaptan is preferable, and an alkyl mercaptan having 4 or more carbon atoms or an alkyl mercaptan substituted with a carboxy group, an ether group or an ester group is preferable. In particular, dodecyl mercaptan and dipentaerythritol hexa-3-mercaptopropionate are preferable from the viewpoint of odor, and thiomalic acid and mercaptopropionic acid are preferable from the viewpoint of promoting developability.
After the polymerization is completed, a purification treatment may be performed. Thereby, content of the compound A can be reduced.
本発明の着色組成物は、上述したポリマーTP以外の他の着色化合物を1種または2種以上含んでいてもよい。他の着色化合物としては、染料化合物、顔料化合物およびそれらの分散物が挙げられる。
顔料化合物を分散物として配合する場合、特開平9-197118号公報、特開2000-239544号公報の記載に従って調製することができる。 << Other colored compounds >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain one or more coloring compounds other than the above-described polymer TP. Examples of other coloring compounds include dye compounds, pigment compounds, and dispersions thereof.
When the pigment compound is blended as a dispersion, it can be prepared according to the descriptions in JP-A-9-197118 and JP-A-2000-239544.
本発明では緑からシアン色の色材が好ましく、ピグメント・グリーン7、ピグメント・グリーン36、ピグメント・グリーン37、ピグメント・グリーン58、ピグメント・ブルー16、ピグメント・ブルー75、もしくはピグメント・ブルー15等のフタロシアニン化合物顔料、ピグメント・ブルー56、もしくはピグメント・ブルー61等のトリアリールカルボニウム化合物顔料、ピグメント・バイオレット23、もしくはピグメント・バイオレット37等のジオキサジン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド177等のアミノアントラキノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド254、ピグメント・レッド255、ピグメント・レッド264、ピグメント・レッド272、ピグメント・オレンジ71、もしくはピグメント・オレンジ73等のジケトピロロピロール化合物顔料、ピグメント・レッド88等のチオインジゴ化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー139、ピグメント・オレンジ66等のイソインドリン化合物顔料、ピグメント・イエロー109、もしくはピグメント・オレンジ61等のイソインドリノン化合物顔料、ピグメント・オレンジ40、もしくはピグメント・レッド216等のピラントロン化合物顔料、またはピグメント・バイオレット31等のイソビオラントロン化合物顔料が好ましい。
特に、他の着色化合物としては、キサンテン化合物、ジピロメテン系金属錯体化合物、オキサジン化合物およびフタロシアニン化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、キサンテン化合物およびジピロメテン系金属錯体化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましい。 Examples of pigment compounds include perylene, perinone, quinacridone, quinacridonequinone, anthraquinone, anthanthrone, benzimidazolone, disazo condensation, disazo, azo, indanthrone, phthalocyanine, triarylcarbonium, dioxazine, aminoanthraquinone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, Indigo, thioindigo, isoindoline, isoindolinone, pyranthrone, isoviolanthrone and the like. More specifically, for example, perylene compound pigments such as Pigment Red 190, Pigment Red 224, and Pigment Violet 29, perinone compound pigments such as Pigment Orange 43, and Pigment Red 194, Pigment Violet 19, and Pigment Violet. 42, quinacridone such as Pigment Red 122, Pigment Red 192, Pigment Red 202, Pigment Red 207, or Pigment Red 209, quinacridone compound pigment, Pigment Red 206, Pigment Orange 48, or Pigment Orange 49 Quinone compound pigment, anthraquinone compound pigment such as pigment yellow 147, anthanthrone compound pigment such as pigment red 168, pigment Benzimidazolone compound pigments such as Pigment Brown 25, Pigment Violet 32, Pigment Orange 36, Pigment Yellow 120, Pigment Yellow 180, Pigment Yellow 181, Pigment Orange 62, or Pigment Red 185; Yellow 93, Pigment Yellow 94, Pigment Yellow 95, Pigment Yellow 128, Pigment Yellow 166, Pigment Orange 34, Pigment Orange 13, Pigment Orange 31, Pigment Red 144, Pigment Red 166, Pigment Red Red 220, Pigment Red 221, Pigment Red 242, Pigment Red 248, Pigment Red 262, or Pigment Disazo condensation compound pigments such as Brown 23, Pigment Yellow 13, Pigment Yellow 83, or Disazo Compound Pigments such as Pigment Yellow 188, Pigment Red 187, Pigment Red 170, Pigment Yellow 74, Pigment Yellow 150, Pigment Red 48, Pigment Red 53, Pigment Orange 64, Pigment Red 247 and other azo compound pigments, Pigment Blue 60 and other indanthrone compound pigments, Pigment Green 7, Pigment Green 36, Pigment Green 37, phthalocyanine compound pigments such as Pigment Green 58, Pigment Blue 16, Pigment Blue 75, and Pigment Blue 15, Pigment Blue 56 Or triarylcarbonium compound pigments such as Pigment Blue 61, dioxazine compound pigments such as Pigment Violet 23 or Pigment Violet 37, aminoanthraquinone compound pigments such as Pigment Red 177, Pigment Red 254, Pigment Red 255, pigment red 264, pigment red 272, pigment orange 71, or diketopyrrolopyrrole compound pigment such as pigment orange 73, thioindigo compound pigment such as pigment red 88, pigment yellow 139, pigment orange 66 Isoindoline compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 109, Pigment Orange 61, and Pigment Oren 40, or pyranthrone compound pigments such as Pigment Red 216 or isoviolanthrone compound pigments, such as Pigment Violet 31, and the like.
In the present invention, a color material of green to cyan is preferable, such as Pigment Green 7, Pigment Green 36, Pigment Green 37, Pigment Green 58, Pigment Blue 16, Pigment Blue 75, or Pigment Blue 15. Phthalocyanine compound pigments, triarylcarbonium compound pigments such as pigment blue 56 or pigment blue 61, dioxazine compound pigments such as pigment violet 23 or pigment violet 37, aminoanthraquinone compound pigments such as pigment red 177, Pigment Red 254, Pigment Red 255, Pigment Red 264, Pigment Red 272, Pigment Orange 71, Pigment Orange 73, etc. Ketopyrrolopyrrole compound pigments, thioindigo compound pigments such as Pigment Red 88, isoindolin compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 139 and Pigment Orange 66, isoindolinone compound pigments such as Pigment Yellow 109 or Pigment Orange 61, Pyranthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Orange 40 or CI Pigment Red 216, or isoviolanthrone compound pigments such as CI Pigment Violet 31 are preferred.
In particular, the other colored compound preferably includes at least one selected from a xanthene compound, a dipyrromethene metal complex compound, an oxazine compound, and a phthalocyanine compound, and includes at least one selected from a xanthene compound and a dipyrromethene metal complex compound. More preferably.
キサンテン化合物は、分子内にキサンテン骨格を有する化合物である。キサンテン化合物としては、例えばカラーインデックス(C.I.)アシッドレッド51(以下、C.I.アシッドレッドの記載を省略し、番号のみの記載とする。他も同様である。)、52、87、92、94、289、388、C.I.アシッドバイオレット9、30、102、C.I.ベーシックレッド1(ローダミン6G)、2、3、4、8、C.I.ベーシックレッド10(ローダミンB)、11、C.I.ベーシックバイオレット10、11、25、C.I.ソルベントレッド218、C.I.モーダントレッド27、C.I.リアクティブレッド36(ローズベンガルB)、スルホローダミンG、特開2010-32999号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物および特許第4492760号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物等が挙げられる。 <Xanthene compound>
The xanthene compound is a compound having a xanthene skeleton in the molecule. As the xanthene compound, for example, Color Index (CI) Acid Red 51 (hereinafter, description of CI Acid Red is omitted, and only the number is described. Others are also the same), 52, 87. 92, 94, 289, 388, C.I. I. Acid Violet 9, 30, 102, C.I. I. Basic Red 1 (Rhodamine 6G), 2, 3, 4, 8, C.I. I. Basic Red 10 (Rhodamine B), 11, C.I. I. Basic violet 10, 11, 25, C.I. I. Solvent Red 218, C.I. I. Modern Tread 27, C.I. I. Reactive red 36 (rose bengal B), sulforhodamine G, xanthene compounds described in JP 2010-32999 A and xanthene compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 4492760.
R1およびR2は、互いに結合して窒素原子を含む環を形成してもよく、R3およびR4は、互いに結合して窒素原子を含む環を形成してもよい;
R5は、-OH、-SO3 -、-SO3H、-SO3 -Z+、-CO2H、-CO2 -Z+、-CO2R8、-SO3R8または-SO2NR9R10を表す;
R6およびR7は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す;
m1は、0~5の整数を表す。m1が2以上のとき、複数のR5は同一でも異なってもよい;
m2およびm3は、それぞれ独立に、0~3の整数を表す。m2およびm3がそれぞれ独立に、2または3のとき、複数のR6およびR7はそれぞれ独立に、同一でも異なってもよい;
aは、0または1を表す;aが0を表す場合、R1~R7のいずれかの基がアニオンを有する;
X-は、アニオンを表す;
Z+は、N+(R11)4、Na+またはK+を表し、4つのR11は同一でも異なってもよい;
R8は、炭素数1~20の1価の飽和炭化水素基を表し、上記飽和炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子は、ハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい;
R9およびR10は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~20の1価の飽和炭化水素基を表し、上記飽和脂肪族炭化水素基に含まれる-CH2-は、-O-、-CO-、-NH-または-NR8-で置換されていてもよく、R9およびR10は、互いに結合して窒素原子を含む3~10員環の複素環を形成していてもよい;
R11は、水素原子、炭素数1~20の1価の飽和炭化水素基または炭素数7~10のアラルキル基を表す。 General formula (1a)
R 1 and R 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom, and R 3 and R 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom;
R 5 is, -OH, -SO 3 -, -SO 3 H, -SO 3 - Z +, -CO 2 H, -CO 2 - Z +, -CO 2 R 8, -SO 3 R 8 or -SO 2 represents NR 9 R 10 ;
R 6 and R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
m1 represents an integer of 0 to 5. when m1 is 2 or more, the plurality of R 5 may be the same or different;
m2 and m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3. when m2 and m3 are each independently 2 or 3, a plurality of R 6 and R 7 may be independently the same or different;
a represents 0 or 1; when a represents 0, any group of R 1 to R 7 has an anion;
X − represents an anion;
Z + represents N + (R 11 ) 4 , Na + or K + , and four R 11 may be the same or different;
R 8 represents a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and the hydrogen atom contained in the saturated hydrocarbon group may be substituted with a halogen atom;
R 9 and R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and —CH 2 — contained in the saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group is —O—, It may be substituted with —CO—, —NH— or —NR 8 —, and R 9 and R 10 may be bonded to each other to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclic ring containing a nitrogen atom ;
R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aralkyl group having 7 to 10 carbon atoms.
R1~R4がこれらの基であることにより、耐熱性により優れるカラーフィルタを形成できる。 The aromatic hydrocarbon group substituent which may have a halogen atom, -R 8, -OH, -OR 8 , -SO 3 -, - SO 3 H, -SO 3 - Z +, -CO 2 H, —CO 2 R 8 , —SR 8 , —SO 2 R 8 , —SO 3 R 8 or —SO 2 NR 9 R 10 may be mentioned. Among them, as the substituent, -SO 3 -, - SO 3 H, -SO 3 - Z + and -SO 2 NR 9 R 10 is preferably, -SO 3 - Z + and -SO 2 NR 9 R 10 Is more preferable. The Z +, -SO 3 - - -SO 3 in this case N + (R 11) 4 are preferred.
When R 1 to R 4 are these groups, a color filter having superior heat resistance can be formed.
中でも、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、が好ましく、特にプロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基が好ましい。
炭素数1~20の1価の飽和炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子は、例えば、炭素数6~10の芳香族炭化水素基またはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい。 Examples of the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in R 8 to R 11 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a nonyl group. Linear alkyl groups such as decyl group, dodecyl group, hexadecyl group, icosyl group; branched alkyl groups such as isopropyl group, isobutyl group, isopentyl group, neopentyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group; cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group And alicyclic saturated hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms such as cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, cyclooctyl group and tricyclodecyl group.
Among them, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyl group are preferable, and a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, a hexyl group, A 2-ethylhexyl group is preferred.
The hydrogen atom contained in the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms may be substituted with, for example, an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms or a halogen atom.
-SO2R8としては、例えば、メチルスルホニル基、エチルスルホニル基、ブチルスルホニル基、ヘキシルスルホニル基、デシルスルホニル基およびイコシルスルホニル基等が挙げられる。
-SO3R8としては、例えば、メトキシスルホニル基、エトキシスルホニル基、プロポキシスルホニル基、tert-ブトキシスルホニル基、ヘキシルオキシスルホニル基およびイコシルオキシスルホニル基等が挙げられる。 Examples of —SR 8 include a methylsulfanyl group, an ethylsulfanyl group, a butylsulfanyl group, a hexylsulfanyl group, a decylsulfanyl group, and an icosylsulfanyl group.
Examples of —SO 2 R 8 include a methylsulfonyl group, an ethylsulfonyl group, a butylsulfonyl group, a hexylsulfonyl group, a decylsulfonyl group, and an icosylsulfonyl group.
Examples of —SO 3 R 8 include a methoxysulfonyl group, an ethoxysulfonyl group, a propoxysulfonyl group, a tert-butoxysulfonyl group, a hexyloxysulfonyl group, and an icosyloxysulfonyl group.
N-メチルスルファモイル基、N-エチルスルファモイル基、N-プロピルスルファモイル基、N-イソプロピルスルファモイル基、N-ブチルスルファモイル基、N-イソブチルスルファモイル基、N-sec-ブチルスルファモイル基、N-tert-ブチルスルファモイル基、N-ペンチルスルファモイル基、N-(1-エチルプロピル)スルファモイル基、N-(1,1-ジメチルプロピル)スルファモイル基、N-(1,2-ジメチルプロピル)スルファモイル基、N-(2-エチルヘキシル)スルファモイル基、N-(2,2-ジメチルプロピル)スルファモイル基、N-(1-メチルブチル)スルファモイル基、N-(2-メチルブチル)スルファモイル基、N-(3-メチルブチル)スルファモイル基、N-シクロペンチルスルファモイル基、N-ヘキシルスルファモイル基、N-(1,3-ジメチルブチル)スルファモイル基、N-(3,3-ジメチルブチル)スルファモイル基、N-ヘプチルスルファモイル基、N-(1-メチルヘキシル)スルファモイル基、N-(1,4-ジメチルペンチル)スルファモイル基、N-オクチルスルファモイル基、N-(2-エチルヘキシル)スルファモイル基、N-(1,5-ジメチル)ヘキシルスルファモイル基、N-(1,1,2,2-テトラメチルブチル)スルファモイル基等のN-1置換スルファモイル基;
N,N-ジメチルスルファモイル基、N,N-エチルメチルスルファモイル基、N,N-ジエチルスルファモイル基、N,N-プロピルメチルスルファモイル基、N,N-イソプロピルメチルスルファモイル基、N,N-tert-ブチルメチルスルファモイル基、N,N-ブチルエチルスルファモイル基、N,N-ビス(1-メチルプロピル)スルファモイル基、N,N-ヘプチルメチルスルファモイル基等のN,N-2置換スルファモイル基等が挙げられる。
中でもN-メチルスルファモイル基、N-エチルスルファモイル基、N-プロピルスルファモイル基、N-イソプロピルスルファモイル基、N-ブチルスルファモイル基、N-ペンチルスルファモイル基、N-(2-エチルヘキシル)スルファモイル基が好ましく、N-メチルスルファモイル基、N-エチルスルファモイル基、N-プロピルスルファモイル基、N-ブチルスルファモイル基、N-(2-エチルヘキシル)スルファモイル基がより好ましい。 —SO 2 NR 9 R 10 includes, for example, a sulfamoyl group;
N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N-propylsulfamoyl group, N-isopropylsulfamoyl group, N-butylsulfamoyl group, N-isobutylsulfamoyl group, N- sec-butylsulfamoyl group, N-tert-butylsulfamoyl group, N-pentylsulfamoyl group, N- (1-ethylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (1,1-dimethylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (1,2-dimethylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (2-ethylhexyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (2,2-dimethylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (1-methylbutyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (2 -Methylbutyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (3-methylbutyl) sulfamoyl group, N-cyclopentyl Rufamoyl group, N-hexylsulfamoyl group, N- (1,3-dimethylbutyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (3,3-dimethylbutyl) sulfamoyl group, N-heptylsulfamoyl group, N- (1- Methylhexyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (1,4-dimethylpentyl) sulfamoyl group, N-octylsulfamoyl group, N- (2-ethylhexyl) sulfamoyl group, N- (1,5-dimethyl) hexylsulfamoyl group An N-1 substituted sulfamoyl group such as an N- (1,1,2,2-tetramethylbutyl) sulfamoyl group;
N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-ethylmethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-diethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-propylmethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-isopropylmethylsulfa Moyl group, N, N-tert-butylmethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-butylethylsulfamoyl group, N, N-bis (1-methylpropyl) sulfamoyl group, N, N-heptylmethylsulfamoyl group And N, N-2 substituted sulfamoyl groups such as a group.
Among them, N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N-propylsulfamoyl group, N-isopropylsulfamoyl group, N-butylsulfamoyl group, N-pentylsulfamoyl group, N -(2-ethylhexyl) sulfamoyl group is preferred, N-methylsulfamoyl group, N-ethylsulfamoyl group, N-propylsulfamoyl group, N-butylsulfamoyl group, N- (2-ethylhexyl) A sulfamoyl group is more preferred.
m1は、1~4の整数が好ましく、1または2がより好ましい。
R6およびR7は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表す。
m2およびm3は、それぞれ独立に、0~3の整数を表し、0が好ましい。
R11における炭素数7~10のアラルキル基としては、ベンジル基、フェニルエチル基、フェニルブチル基等が挙げられる。 R 5 is, -CO 2 H, -CO 2 - Z +, -CO 2 R 8, -CO 2 NHR 9, -SO 3 -, -SO 3 - Z +, -SO 3 H, -SO 2 R 8 or -SO 2 NHR 9 is preferably,, -SO 3 -, -SO 3 - Z +, -SO 3 H or -SO 2 NHR 9 is more preferable.
m1 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
R 6 and R 7 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
m2 and m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3, with 0 being preferred.
Examples of the aralkyl group having 7 to 10 carbon atoms in R 11 include a benzyl group, a phenylethyl group, and a phenylbutyl group.
X-は、一般式(1a)に含まれるカチオンの価数に応じて含まれ、通常、1価または2価であり、1価が好ましい。アニオンX-としては、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオン、ヨウ素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、過塩素酸アニオン等や低求核性アニオンが例示され、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオンまたはヨウ素アニオンが好ましい。低求核性アニオンとは、硫酸のpKaより低いpKaを有する有機酸が解離したアニオン構造を示す。アニオンの例として、特開2007-310315号公報の段落番号0075に記載の低求核性アニオン、特開2012-173399号公報の段落0016~0025に記載のアニオン、特開2013-037316号公報の段落0025~0033に記載のアニオン部等が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Z+は、N+(R11)4、Na+またはK+であり、好ましくはN+(R11)4である。
N+(R11)4は、4つのR11のうち、少なくとも2つが炭素数5~20の1価の飽和炭化水素基であることが好ましい。また、4つのR11の合計炭素数は、20~80が好ましく、20~60がより好ましい。 a represents 0 or 1, and when a represents 0, any one of R 1 to R 7 preferably has an anion, and R 5 preferably has an anion.
X − is included depending on the valence of the cation contained in the general formula (1a), and is usually monovalent or divalent, and monovalent is preferable. Examples of the anion X − include a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, and a low nucleophilic anion. A fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion or an iodine anion is preferable. . The low nucleophilic anion indicates an anion structure in which an organic acid having a pKa lower than that of sulfuric acid is dissociated. Examples of anions include low nucleophilic anions described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP2007-310315, anions described in paragraphs 0016 to 0025 of JP2012-173399, and JP2013-037316A. Examples include the anion moiety described in paragraphs 0025 to 0033, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Z + is N + (R 11 ) 4 , Na + or K + , preferably N + (R 11 ) 4 .
N + (R 11 ) 4 is preferably a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, at least two of the four R 11 . Further, the total carbon number of the four R 11 is preferably 20 to 80, and more preferably 20 to 60.
R33およびR34は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、炭素数1~4のアルキルスルファニル基または炭素数1~4のアルキルスルホニル基を表す。
R31およびR33は、互いに結合して窒素原子を含む環を形成してもよく、R32およびR34は、互いに結合して窒素原子を含む環を形成してもよい。
pおよびqは、それぞれ独立に、0~5の整数を表す。pが2以上のとき、複数のR33は同一でも異なってもよい。qが2以上のとき、複数のR34は同一でも異なってもよい。
R11は、一般式(1a)中のR11と同義である。
R 33 and R 34 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfanyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
R 31 and R 33 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom, and R 32 and R 34 may be bonded to each other to form a ring containing a nitrogen atom.
p and q each independently represents an integer of 0 to 5. When p is 2 or more, the plurality of R 33 may be the same or different. When q is 2 or more, the plurality of R 34 may be the same or different.
R 11 has the same meaning as R 11 in the general formula (1a).
炭素数6~10の芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる水素原子が置換されていてもよい炭素数1~3のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基等が挙げられる。
R31およびR32は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~3の1価の飽和炭化水素基であることが好ましい。 Examples of the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in R 31 and R 32 include carbon among the monovalent saturated hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms described for R 8 in the general formula (1a). Examples thereof include monovalent saturated hydrocarbon groups of several 1 to 10. Of these, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, hexyl and 2-ethylhexyl are preferred. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms which may be present as a substituent include the monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms described for R 1 in the general formula (1a). Can be mentioned.
Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in which the hydrogen atom contained in the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms may be substituted include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group.
R 31 and R 32 are preferably each independently a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
R33およびR34における炭素数1~4のアルキルスルファニル基としては、メチルスルファニル基、エチルスルファニル基、プロピルスルファニル基、ブチルスルファニル基およびイソプロピルスルファニル基等が挙げられる。
R33およびR34における炭素数1~4のアルキルスルホニル基としては、メチルスルホニル基、エチルスルホニル基、プロピルスルホニル基、ブチルスルホニル基およびイソプロピルスルホニル基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in R 33 and R 34 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, and a tert-butyl group. Of these, a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group are preferable.
The alkylsulfanyl group R 33 and carbon atoms in R 34 1 ~ 4, methylsulfanyl group, ethylsulfanyl group, propylsulfanyl group, a butyl sulfanyl group and an isopropyl sulfanyl group.
Examples of the alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms for R 33 and R 34 include a methylsulfonyl group, an ethylsulfonyl group, a propylsulfonyl group, a butylsulfonyl group, and an isopropylsulfonyl group.
ジピロメテン系金属錯体化合物としては、一般式(I)で表される化合物が金属原子または金属化合物に配位した化合物が挙げられる。 <Dipyrromethene-based metal complex compound>
Examples of the dipyrromethene metal complex compound include compounds in which the compound represented by the general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound.
なお、形成される5員、6員および7員の環が、さらに置換可能な基である場合には、上述した置換基群Aのいずれかで置換されていてもよく、2個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In general formula (I), R 1 and R 2 , R 2 and R 3 , R 4 and R 5 , and R 5 and R 6 are each independently bonded to each other to form 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered A ring may be formed. Examples of the ring formed include a saturated ring and an unsaturated ring. Examples of the 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered saturated ring or unsaturated ring include a pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, Examples include a piperidine ring, a cyclopentene ring, a cyclohexene ring, a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring and a pyridazine ring, and preferably a benzene ring and a pyridine ring.
In addition, when the formed 5-membered, 6-membered and 7-membered rings are further substitutable groups, they may be substituted with any of the above-mentioned substituent group A, and two or more substituents may be substituted. When substituted with a group, the substituents may be the same or different.
一般式(I)中、R3およびR4は、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基が好ましく、アルキル基またはアリール基が好ましい。 In general formula (I), R 2 and R 5 are preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a nitrile group, an imide group, a carbamoylsulfonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, Aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, nitrile group, imide group, carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, nitrile group, imide group, carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, An alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, and a carbamoyl group are particularly preferable.
In general formula (I), R 3 and R 4 are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and more preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
R3およびR4がヘテロ環基を表す場合、ヘテロ環基としては、2-チエニル基、4-ピリジル基、3-ピリジル基、2-ピリジル基、2-フリル基、2-ピリミジニル基、2-ベンゾチアゾリル基、1-イミダゾリル基、1-ピラゾリル基またはベンゾトリアゾール-1-イル基が好ましく、2-チエニル基、4-ピリジル基、2-フリル基、2-ピリミジニル基または1-ピリジル基がより好ましい。 In the general formula (I), when R 3 and R 4 represent an aryl group, the aryl group is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
When R 3 and R 4 represent a heterocyclic group, the heterocyclic group includes a 2-thienyl group, 4-pyridyl group, 3-pyridyl group, 2-pyridyl group, 2-furyl group, 2-pyrimidinyl group, 2 A benzothiazolyl group, a 1-imidazolyl group, a 1-pyrazolyl group or a benzotriazol-1-yl group, more preferably a 2-thienyl group, a 4-pyridyl group, a 2-furyl group, a 2-pyrimidinyl group or a 1-pyridyl group preferable.
金属または金属化合物としては、錯体を形成可能な金属原子または金属化合物であればいずれであってもよく、2価の金属原子、2価の金属酸化物、2価の金属水酸化物、または2価の金属塩化物が含まれる。例えば、Zn、Mg、Si、Sn、Rh、Pt、Pd、Mo、Mn、Pb、Cu、Ni、Co、Fe、B等の他に、AlCl、InCl、FeCl、TiCl2、SnCl2、SiCl2、GeCl2などの金属塩化物、TiO、VO等の金属酸化物、Si(OH)2等の金属水酸化物も含まれる。
これらの中でも、錯体の安定性、分光特性、耐熱、耐光性、および製造適性等の観点から、Fe、Zn、Mg、Si、Pt、Pd、Mo、Mn、Cu、Ni、Co、TiO、B、またはVOが好ましく、Fe、Zn、Mg、Si、Pt、Pd、Cu、Ni、Co、B、またはVOがさらに好ましく、Fe、Zn、Cu、Co、B、またはVO(V=O)が特に好ましい。これらの中でも、特にZnが好ましい。 Next, the metal atom or metal compound that forms the dipyrromethene-based metal complex compound will be described.
The metal or metal compound may be any metal atom or metal compound capable of forming a complex, a divalent metal atom, a divalent metal oxide, a divalent metal hydroxide, or 2 Valent metal chlorides are included. For example, Zn, Mg, Si, Sn , Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, in addition to B, such as, AlCl, InCl, FeCl, TiCl 2, SnCl 2, SiCl 2 Further, metal chlorides such as GeCl 2 , metal oxides such as TiO and VO, and metal hydroxides such as Si (OH) 2 are also included.
Among these, Fe, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Cu, Ni, Co, TiO, B from the viewpoint of the stability, spectral characteristics, heat resistance, light resistance, and production suitability of the complex Or VO is preferable, Fe, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, B, or VO is more preferable, and Fe, Zn, Cu, Co, B, or VO (V = O) is more preferable. Particularly preferred. Among these, Zn is particularly preferable.
ジピロメテン系金属錯体化合物の具体例としては、特開2012-237985号公報の段落0179~0186の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A preferred embodiment of the dipyrromethene-based metal complex compound in which the compound represented by the general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound is described in paragraphs 0153 to 0176 of JP2012-237985A. The complex compounds represented by 1), (I-2) or (I-3) can be taken into account, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
As specific examples of the dipyrromethene-based metal complex compound, the description in paragraphs 0179 to 0186 of JP2012-237985A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。重合性化合物としては、例えば、少なくとも1個のエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する付加重合性化合物を挙げることができる。 << polymerizable compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound. Examples of the polymerizable compound include addition polymerizable compounds having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
本発明の組成物は、重合性化合物を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 15 to 75% by mass, and more preferably 20 to 60% from the viewpoint of more effectively obtaining the effects of the present invention. Mass% is particularly preferred.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound or two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤は、重合性化合物を重合させ得るものであれば、特に制限はなく、特性、開始効率、吸収波長、入手性、コスト等の観点で選ばれるのが好ましい。 << photopolymerization initiator >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can polymerize a polymerizable compound, and is preferably selected from the viewpoints of characteristics, initiation efficiency, absorption wavelength, availability, cost, and the like.
オキシム系化合物の具体的な例としては、特開2013-182215号公報の段落0053の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The oxime compound (hereinafter also referred to as “oxime photopolymerization initiator”) is not particularly limited, and is described in, for example, JP-A No. 2000-80068, WO 02 / 100903A1, and JP-A No. 2001-233842. These oxime compounds are mentioned.
As specific examples of the oxime compound, the description in paragraph 0053 of JP2013-182215A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
R103およびR104は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を示し、これらの基は、さらにハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アルキルカルボニル基等で置換されていても良い。 R102 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, which may be substituted.
R 103 and R 104 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and these groups are further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyl group or the like. Also good.
R105~R111のうちの、一つまたは二つが電子吸引性の置換基、即ち、ニトロ基、シアノ基、アルキルカルボニル基またはアリールカルボニル基であることが、一段と高い硬化性を有する着色組成物が得られるので、好ましい。 R 105 to R 111 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloyl group, a heteroaryloyl group, an alkylthio group, an aryloylthio group, or a heteroaryloyl group. , Alkylcarbonyl group, arylcarbonyl group, heterocyclic carbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, nitro group, amino group, sulfonic acid group, hydroxy group, carboxylic acid group, amide group, carbamoyl Represents a group or a cyano group.
A colored composition having much higher curability when one or two of R 105 to R 111 is an electron-withdrawing substituent, that is, a nitro group, a cyano group, an alkylcarbonyl group or an arylcarbonyl group. Is preferable.
上記一般式(2)で表されるフルオレン構造を有する化合物は、例えばWO2014-050738号公報に記載された合成方法に準じて合成することができる。
オキシム系光重合開始剤の市販品としては、IRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司社製)、アデカアークルズNCI-831(ADEKA社製)、アデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)等を用いることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having a fluorene structure represented by the general formula (2) include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0087 to 0088 of JP 2014-177502 A, the contents of which are described in this specification. It will be incorporated.
The compound having a fluorene structure represented by the general formula (2) can be synthesized according to a synthesis method described in, for example, WO2014-050738.
Commercially available oxime photopolymerization initiators include IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arcles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA), Adeka Arcles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA) and the like can be used.
本発明は、光重合開始剤として、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。 In addition to the above photopolymerization initiator, other known photopolymerization initiators described in paragraph No. 0079 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 may be used in the colored composition of the present invention.
In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and compounds described in JP-A 2013-164471 ( C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
本発明の組成物は、光重合開始剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 3 to 20% by mass, more preferably 4 to 19% by mass, from the viewpoint of more effectively obtaining the effects of the present invention. 18% by mass is particularly preferred.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
本発明の着色組成物は、有機溶剤を含有することが好ましい。
有機溶剤は、並存する各成分の溶解性や着色組成物としたときの塗布性を満足できるものであれば、基本的には特に制限はなく、特に、バインダーの溶解性、塗布性、安全性を考慮して選ばれることが好ましい。 << Organic solvent >>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains an organic solvent.
The organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it can satisfy the solubility of each coexisting component and the coating property when it is a colored composition, and in particular, the solubility, coating property, and safety of the binder. Is preferably selected in consideration of
本発明の着色組成物は、有機溶剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration in the composition is from 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably from 15 to 60% by mass.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
本発明の着色組成物は、アルカリ可溶性バインダーを含んでいることが好ましい。アルカリ可溶性バインダーは、アルカリ可溶性を有すること以外は、特に限定はなく、好ましくは、耐熱性、現像性、入手性等の観点から選択することができる。 << Alkali-soluble binder >>
It is preferable that the coloring composition of this invention contains the alkali-soluble binder. The alkali-soluble binder is not particularly limited except that it has alkali solubility, and can be preferably selected from the viewpoints of heat resistance, developability, availability, and the like.
R1がアルキル基を表す場合のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~10の分岐鎖を有するアルキル基、炭素数5~20の環状アルキル基などが挙げられる。
アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アルキル基に導入可能な置換基としては、フェニル基、カルボニル基、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基などが挙げられる。
R1がアリール基を表す場合のアリール基としては、単環構造のアリール基、多環構造のアリール基、縮環構造のアリール基、ヘテロ原子を含むヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。より具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基、ビフェニル基、ベンゾイミダゾリル基、ピリジル基、フリル基などが挙げられる。
アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アリール基に導入可能な置換基としては、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基等のアルキル基、メトキシ基等のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、ニトロ基、クロロ基、ブロモ基などが挙げられる。
Examples of the alkyl group when R 1 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. Can be mentioned.
The alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, and an amino group.
When R 1 represents an aryl group, examples of the aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, a heteroaryl group containing a hetero atom, and the like. More specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
The aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include an alkyl group such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, and a cyclohexyl group, an alkoxy group such as a methoxy group, Examples thereof include a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アルキル基に導入可能な置換基としては、フェニル基、カルボニル基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。
R4がアリール基を表す場合のアリール基としては、単環構造のアリール基、多環構造のアリール基、縮環構造のアリール基、ヘテロ原子を含むヘテロアリール基などが挙げられる。より具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラニル基、ビフェニル基、ベンゾイミダゾリル基、インドリル基、イミダゾリル基、オキサゾリル基、カルバゾリル基、ピリジル基、フリル基などが挙げられる。
アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、アリール基に導入可能な置換基としては、ノニル基、メチル基、エチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基等のアルキル基、メトキシ基等のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、ニトロ基、クロロ基、ブロモ基などが挙げられる。 Examples of the alkyl group when R 4 represents an alkyl group include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having a branched chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms. Can be mentioned.
The alkyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the alkyl group include a phenyl group, a carbonyl group, and an alkoxy group.
Examples of the aryl group when R 4 represents an aryl group include a monocyclic aryl group, a polycyclic aryl group, a condensed ring aryl group, and a heteroaryl group containing a heteroatom. More specifically, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthranyl group, a biphenyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, an indolyl group, an imidazolyl group, an oxazolyl group, a carbazolyl group, a pyridyl group, a furyl group, and the like can be given.
The aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced into the aryl group include a nonyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclohexyl group and other alkyl groups, and a methoxy group. Examples thereof include an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, a nitro group, a chloro group, and a bromo group.
一般式(X)
Formula (X)
アルカリ可溶性バインダーの酸価は、10~1000mg/KOHが好ましく、50~300mg/KOHがより好ましく、50~200mg/KOHがさらに好ましく、105~200mg/KOHが特に好ましい。 The alkali-soluble binder preferably has a weight average molecular weight (polystyrene equivalent value measured by GPC method) of 1,000 to 200,00 from the viewpoint of developability, liquid viscosity, etc., and 2,000 to 100,000. Is more preferable, and 5,000 to 50,000 is particularly preferable.
The acid value of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 1000 mg / KOH, more preferably 50 to 300 mg / KOH, still more preferably 50 to 200 mg / KOH, and particularly preferably 105 to 200 mg / KOH.
本発明の組成物は、アルカリ可溶性バインダーを、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the alkali-soluble binder is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 20 to 60% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble binder or two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
本発明の着色組成物は、架橋剤をさらに含んでいてもよい。
架橋剤としては、架橋反応により膜硬化を行なえるものであれば、特に限定はなく、例えば、(a)エポキシ樹脂、(b)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、メラミン化合物、グアナミン化合物、グリコールウリル化合物またはウレア化合物、(c)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、フェノール化合物、ナフトール化合物またはヒドロキシアントラセン化合物、が挙げられる。中でも、多官能エポキシ樹脂が好ましい。
架橋剤の具体例などの詳細については、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0134~0147の記載を参照することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
本発明の着色組成物が架橋剤を含有する場合、架橋剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~50質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.5~30質量%である。 << Crosslinking agent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may further contain a crosslinking agent.
The crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction. For example, at least selected from (a) an epoxy resin, (b) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group. Substituted with at least one substituent selected from a melamine compound, a guanamine compound, a glycoluril compound or a urea compound, (c) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group, which is substituted with one substituent; Phenol compounds, naphthol compounds or hydroxyanthracene compounds. Of these, polyfunctional epoxy resins are preferred.
For details such as specific examples of the crosslinking agent, reference can be made to the description in paragraphs 0134 to 0147 of JP-A No. 2004-295116, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a crosslinking agent, the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30%, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. % By mass.
本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含んでいても良い。界面活性剤は、ノニオン系、カチオン系、アニオン系のいずれでもよいが、エチレンオキサイド構造を持つ界面活性剤、フッ素系界面活性剤が好ましい。特にHLB(Hydrophile-Lipophile Balance)値が9.2~15.5の範囲にあるエチレンオキサイド構造を持つ界面活性剤もしくは特開平2-54202号公報記載のフッ素系界面活性剤が好ましい。
本発明の着色組成物が界面活性剤を含有する場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.005~1.0質量%である。
本発明の組成物は、界面活性剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 << Surfactant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant. The surfactant may be nonionic, cationic, or anionic, but a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure and a fluorosurfactant are preferred. In particular, a surfactant having an ethylene oxide structure having an HLB (Hydrophile-Lipophile Balance) value in the range of 9.2 to 15.5 or a fluorosurfactant described in JP-A-2-54202 is preferred.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. 0.005 to 1.0 mass%.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
本発明の着色組成物は、染料安定化剤を含んでもよい。染料安定化剤としては、高分子界面活性剤(高分子分散剤)が好ましい。高分子分散剤としては、例えば、ポリアクリル酸エステル等の不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体類;ポリアクリル酸等の不飽和カルボン酸の(共)重合体の(部分)アミン塩、(部分)アンモニウム塩や(部分)アルキルアミン塩類;水酸基含有ポリアクリル酸エステル等の水酸基含有不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体やそれらの編成物;架橋性基を有するスルホン酸やリン酸の重合物等が挙げられる。架橋性基としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の重合性基を用いることができる。具体的には(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基、ビニル基、環状エーテル基、メチロール基が挙げられるが、(メタ)アクリル基、スチレン基、ビニル基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリル基およびスチレン基がより好ましい。
また、染料安定化剤として、下記アニオンの塩(リチウム塩、ナトリウム塩、カリウム塩等)を加えることも有効である。
本発明の着色組成物が染料安定化剤を含有する場合、染料安定化剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~50質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.5~30質量%である。
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a dye stabilizer. As the dye stabilizer, a polymer surfactant (polymer dispersant) is preferable. Examples of the polymer dispersant include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid such as polyacrylic acid; (Partial) ammonium salt and (partial) alkylamine salt; (co) polymer of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid ester such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylic acid ester or knitted product thereof; sulfonic acid or phosphoric acid having a crosslinkable group And the like. As the crosslinkable group, a known polymerizable group that can be cross-linked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used. Specific examples include (meth) acryl groups, styrene groups, vinyl groups, cyclic ether groups, and methylol groups, with (meth) acryl groups, styrene groups, and vinyl groups being preferred, and (meth) acryl groups and styrene groups being preferred. More preferred.
It is also effective to add the following anion salts (lithium salt, sodium salt, potassium salt, etc.) as a dye stabilizer.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a dye stabilizer, the content of the dye stabilizer is preferably 0.01 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. .5 to 30% by mass.
本発明の着色組成物は、酸化防止剤を含んでいてもよい。酸化防止剤としては、例えば、ラジカル捕捉剤、過酸化物分解剤、紫外線吸収剤、一重項酸素クエンチャー等を挙げることができる。
ラジカル捕捉剤としては、例えば、フェノール系酸化防止剤、ヒンダードアミン系酸化防止剤等を挙げることができる。フェノール系酸化防止剤としては、例えば、ヒドロキシフェニルプロピオネート系化合物、ヒドロキシベンジル系化合物、チオビスフェノール系化合物、チオメチルフェノール系化合物、アルカンジイルフェノール系化合物等を挙げることができる。中でも、色特性の安定性の観点から、ヒドロキシフェニルプロピオネート系化合物が好ましい。
例えば、特開2012-155243号公報の段落0013~0034、特開2013-14748号公報の段落0030~0042に記載の化合物を好ましく用いることができる。
過酸化物分解剤は、光に曝露されること等により発生した過酸化物を無害な物質に分解し、新たなラジカルが発生しないようにする化合物であり、例えば、リン系酸化防止剤、イオウ系酸化防止剤等を挙げることができる。中でも、色特性の安定性の観点から、イオウ系酸化防止剤が好ましい。
紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、サルチル酸エステル系酸化防止剤、ベンゾフェノン系酸化防止剤を挙げることができる。
一重項酸素クエンチャーは、一重項状態の酸素からのエネルギー移動により一重項酸素を失活させ得る化合物であり、例えば、テトラメチルエチレン、シクロペンテン等のエチレン性化合物、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、1,4-ジアザビシクロオクタン(DABCO)、N-エチルイミダゾール等のアミン類、置換されても良いナフタレン、ジメチルナフタレン、ジメトキシアントラセン、アントラセン、ジフェニルアントラセン等の縮合多環芳香族化合物;1,3-ジフェニルイソベンゾフラン、1,2,3,4-テトラフェニル-1,3-シクロペンタジエン、ペンタフェニルシクロペンタジエン等の芳香族化合物の他、Harry H.wasserman,Singlet Oxygen,5章,Academic Press(1979)、Nicholas J.Turro,Modern Molecular Photochemistry,14章,The Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co.,Inc.(1978)、およびCMC社発行 カラー写真感光材料用高機能ケミカルス,7章(2002)に、一重項酸素クエンチャーとして例示されている化合物を挙げることができる。
このほかに硫黄原子を有する化合物を配位子とする金属錯体を挙げることができる。このような化合物としてビスジチオ-α-ジケトン、ビスフェニルジチオール、およびチオビスフェノールを配位子とする、ニッケル錯体、コバルト錯体、銅錯体、マンガン錯体、白金錯体等の遷移金属キレート化合物を挙げることができる。
イオウ系酸化防止剤としては、チオプロピオネート系化合物、メルカプトベンズイミダゾール系化合物を挙げることができる。中でも、色特性の安定性の観点から、チオプロピオネート系化合物が好ましい。 << Antioxidant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant. Examples of the antioxidant include a radical scavenger, a peroxide decomposer, an ultraviolet absorber, and a singlet oxygen quencher.
Examples of the radical scavenger include phenolic antioxidants and hindered amine antioxidants. Examples of phenolic antioxidants include hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds, hydroxybenzyl compounds, thiobisphenol compounds, thiomethylphenol compounds, alkanediylphenol compounds, and the like. Of these, hydroxyphenylpropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
For example, compounds described in paragraphs 0013 to 0034 of JP2012-155243A and paragraphs 0030 to 0042 of JP2013-14748A can be preferably used.
A peroxide decomposer is a compound that decomposes peroxides generated by exposure to light into harmless substances and prevents the generation of new radicals. For example, phosphorus antioxidants, sulfur And system antioxidants. Among these, sulfur-based antioxidants are preferable from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include salicylate-based antioxidants and benzophenone-based antioxidants.
A singlet oxygen quencher is a compound that can deactivate singlet oxygen by energy transfer from oxygen in a singlet state. For example, an ethylenic compound such as tetramethylethylene and cyclopentene, diethylamine, triethylamine, 1,4- Amines such as diazabicyclooctane (DABCO) and N-ethylimidazole, condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as optionally substituted naphthalene, dimethylnaphthalene, dimethoxyanthracene, anthracene and diphenylanthracene; 1,3-diphenylisobenzofuran In addition to aromatic compounds such as 1,2,3,4-tetraphenyl-1,3-cyclopentadiene and pentaphenylcyclopentadiene, Harry H. et al. wasserman, Single Oxygen, Chapter 5, Academic Press (1979), Nicholas J. et al. Turro, Modern Molecular Photochemistry, Chapter 14, The Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. , Inc. (1978), and CMC Co., Ltd., High Performance Chemicals for Color Photosensitive Materials, Chapter 7 (2002) can include compounds exemplified as singlet oxygen quenchers.
In addition, a metal complex having a sulfur atom-containing compound as a ligand can be exemplified. Examples of such compounds include transition metal chelate compounds such as nickel complexes, cobalt complexes, copper complexes, manganese complexes, and platinum complexes having bisdithio-α-diketone, bisphenyldithiol, and thiobisphenol as ligands. .
Examples of the sulfur antioxidant include thiopropionate compounds and mercaptobenzimidazole compounds. Of these, thiopropionate compounds are preferred from the viewpoint of the stability of color characteristics.
本発明の着色組成物は、硬化促進剤として機能する化合物を含有することができる。
例えば、芳香族アミン化合物、3級アミン化合物、アミン塩、ホスホニウム塩、アミジン塩、アミド化合物、チオール化合物、ブロックイソシアネート化合物およびイミダゾール環含有化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの化合物を用いることができる。
着色組成物が、硬化促進剤を含有することにより、着色組成物の低温硬化をより効果的に実現することができる。併せて、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上させることもできる。
硬化促進剤の市販品としては、カレンズMTBD-1などのカレンズMTシリーズ(昭和電工(株)製)等を挙げることができる。
本発明において、硬化促進剤は、単独でまたは2種以上を混合して使用することができる。硬化促進剤の含有量は、重合性化合物100質量部に対して、好ましくは0.01~20質量部、特に好ましくは0.1~10質量部である。 << Curing accelerator >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound that functions as a curing accelerator.
For example, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of aromatic amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, amine salts, phosphonium salts, amidine salts, amide compounds, thiol compounds, blocked isocyanate compounds, and imidazole ring-containing compounds can be used. .
When the coloring composition contains a curing accelerator, low-temperature curing of the coloring composition can be more effectively realized. In addition, the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved.
Examples of commercially available curing accelerators include Karenz MT series such as Karenz MTBD-1 (manufactured by Showa Denko KK).
In this invention, a hardening accelerator can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types. The content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
本発明の着色組成物は、還元防止剤を含有することもできる。還元防止剤としては、キノン化合物が好ましく、分子量100~800程度の以下構造のキノン化合物がより好ましい。 << Reduction inhibitor >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can also contain a reduction inhibitor. The reduction inhibitor is preferably a quinone compound, more preferably a quinone compound having a molecular weight of about 100 to 800 and having the following structure.
本発明の着色組成物は、酸発生剤を含有することもできる。酸発生剤は、光酸発生剤であっても、熱酸発生剤であってもよいが、熱酸発生剤が好ましい。熱酸発生剤を用いると硬化膜の耐熱性がより向上する傾向にある。
熱酸発生剤は、1013.25hPaで100~250℃で加熱したときに、酸を発生する酸発生剤をいう。発生する酸としては、pKa5以下の酸が好ましい。発生する酸の具体例としては、スルホン酸、カルボン酸、リン酸等が例示され、スルホン酸がより好ましい。
光酸発生剤としては、特開2006-259002号公報の段落0103~0113の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
熱酸発生剤には、イオン性化合物(オニウム塩)および非イオン性化合物が含まれる。
イオン性化合物(オニウム塩)としては、重金属やハロゲンイオンを含まないものが好ましく、スルホン酸のオニウム塩が好ましい。
イオン性の熱酸発生剤としては、具体的には、トリフェニルスルホニウム、1-ジメチルチオナフタレン、1-ジメチルチオ-4-ヒドロキシナフタレン、1-ジメチルチオ-4,7-ジヒドロキシナフタレン、4-ヒドロキシフェニルジメチルスルホニウム、ベンジル-4-ヒドロキシフェニルメチルスルホニウム、2-メチルベンジル-4-ヒドロキシフェニルメチルスルホニウム、2-メチルベンジル-4-アセチルフェニルメチルスルホニウム、2-メチルベンジル-4-ベンゾイルオキシフェニルメチルスルホニウム、これらのメタンスルホン酸塩、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸塩、カンファースルホン酸塩、p-トルエンスルホン酸塩、ヘキサフルオロホスホン酸塩等が挙げられる。 << Acid generator >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can also contain an acid generator. The acid generator may be a photoacid generator or a thermal acid generator, but a thermal acid generator is preferred. When a thermal acid generator is used, the heat resistance of the cured film tends to be further improved.
The thermal acid generator refers to an acid generator that generates an acid when heated at 100 to 250 ° C. at 101.25 hPa. The acid generated is preferably an acid having a pKa of 5 or less. Specific examples of the acid generated include sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, phosphoric acid and the like, and sulfonic acid is more preferable.
As the photoacid generator, the description in paragraphs 0103 to 0113 of JP-A-2006-259002 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
Thermal acid generators include ionic compounds (onium salts) and nonionic compounds.
As the ionic compound (onium salt), those containing no heavy metal or halogen ion are preferable, and onium salts of sulfonic acid are preferable.
Specific examples of the ionic thermal acid generator include triphenylsulfonium, 1-dimethylthionaphthalene, 1-dimethylthio-4-hydroxynaphthalene, 1-dimethylthio-4,7-dihydroxynaphthalene, 4-hydroxyphenyldimethyl. Sulfonium, benzyl-4-hydroxyphenylmethylsulfonium, 2-methylbenzyl-4-hydroxyphenylmethylsulfonium, 2-methylbenzyl-4-acetylphenylmethylsulfonium, 2-methylbenzyl-4-benzoyloxyphenylmethylsulfonium, these Examples include methanesulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, camphorsulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, hexafluorophosphonate and the like.
本発明の着色組成物は、ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド塩をさらに含んでいてもよい。ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド塩を含むことで耐熱性を向上できる。ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド塩としては、カリウムビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド、ナトリウムビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド、リチウムビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドなどが挙げられる。ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド塩の含有量は、ポリマーTPが有するトリアリールメタン繰返し単位の1モルに対し、0.1~2モルが好ましく、0.3~0.8モルがより好ましい。
本発明の着色組成物は、さらに必要に応じて、充填材、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤、増感剤や光安定剤等など各種添加剤を含んでいても良い。 << Other ingredients >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may further contain a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt. Heat resistance can be improved by including a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt. Examples of the bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt include potassium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide, sodium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide, lithium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide and the like. The content of the bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt is preferably from 0.1 to 2 mol, more preferably from 0.3 to 0.8 mol, based on 1 mol of the triarylmethane repeating unit of the polymer TP.
The coloring composition of the present invention may further contain various additives such as a filler, an ultraviolet absorber, an aggregation inhibitor, a sensitizer and a light stabilizer, as necessary.
本発明の着色組成物は、前述の各成分と必要に応じて任意成分とを混合することで調整できる。
着色組成物の調製に際しては、着色組成物を構成する各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分を溶剤に溶解・分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解・分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液・分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して組成物として調製してもよい。
本発明の着色組成物は、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、フィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているものであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量を含む)等を用いたフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)が好ましい。
フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μm程度が適しており、好ましくは0.01~3.0μm程度、さらに好ましくは0.05~0.5μm程度である。この範囲とすることにより、後工程において均一及び平滑な着色組成物の調製を阻害する、微細な異物を確実に除去することが可能となる。 <Method for preparing colored composition>
The coloring composition of this invention can be adjusted by mixing each component mentioned above and arbitrary components as needed.
In preparing the colored composition, the components constituting the colored composition may be blended together, or may be blended sequentially after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the charging order and working conditions when blending. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
The colored composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects. Any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration. For example, fluorine resins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resins such as nylon-6 and nylon-6,6, polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (including high density and ultra high molecular weight), etc. The filter using is mentioned. Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) is preferable.
The pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.01 to 7.0 μm, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 μm, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 μm. By setting it as this range, it becomes possible to remove reliably the fine foreign material which inhibits preparation of the uniform and smooth coloring composition in a post process.
また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)又は株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択することができる。
第2のフィルタは、上述した第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用することができる。
例えば、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、分散液のみで行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタリングを行ってもよい。 When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within the range mentioned above. The pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
For example, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
本発明の硬化膜は、本発明の着色組成物を硬化してなる。かかる硬化膜はカラーフィルタに好ましく用いられる。 <Method for producing cured film, color filter, color filter>
The cured film of the present invention is formed by curing the colored composition of the present invention. Such a cured film is preferably used for a color filter.
また、本発明の着色組成物を用いて固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを製造する場合には、特開2011-252065号公報の段落0359~0371に記載されている製造方法を採用することもできる。 The color filter of the present invention may be formed by any method as long as it can form a colored region (colored pattern) cured by applying the colored composition of the present invention on a substrate. Preferably, it is produced using the coloring composition of the present invention.
In the case of producing a color filter for a solid-state imaging device using the colored composition of the present invention, the production method described in paragraphs 0359 to 0371 of JP2011-252065A can also be employed. .
着色組成物層を形成する工程では、基材上に、本発明の着色組成物を適用して着色組成物層を形成する。 << Step of Forming Colored Composition Layer >>
In the step of forming the colored composition layer, the colored composition layer is formed by applying the colored composition of the present invention on the substrate.
また、プラスチック基板は、その表面に、ガスバリヤー層および/または耐溶剤性層を有していることが好ましい。 As the substrate, for example, alkali-free glass, sodium glass, Pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass used for liquid crystal display elements and the like, and those obtained by attaching a transparent conductive film thereto, solid-state imaging elements, and the like are used. Examples of the photoelectric conversion element substrate include a silicon substrate and a plastic substrate. On these substrates, a black matrix for isolating each pixel may be formed, or a transparent resin layer may be provided for promoting adhesion. Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the substrate in order to improve adhesion to the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or flatten the surface.
The plastic substrate preferably has a gas barrier layer and / or a solvent resistant layer on its surface.
TFT方式液晶駆動用基板における基板としては、例えば、ガラス、シリコーン、ポリカーボネート、ポリエステル、芳香族ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、ポリイミド等を挙げることができる。これらの基板には、所望により、シランカップリング剤等での薬品処理、プラズマ処理、イオンプレーティング、スパッタリング、気相反応法、真空蒸着等の適宜の前処理を施しておくこともできる。例えば、TFT方式液晶駆動用基板の表面に、窒化ケイ素膜等のパッシベーション膜を形成した基板を用いることができる。 In addition, a driving substrate on which a thin film transistor (TFT) of a thin film transistor (TFT) type color liquid crystal display device is disposed (hereinafter referred to as “TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate”) is used as the substrate. A color filter using the colored composition of the present invention can also be formed on the top to produce a color filter.
Examples of the substrate in the TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate include glass, silicone, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. These substrates may be subjected to appropriate pretreatment such as chemical treatment with a silane coupling agent, plasma treatment, ion plating, sputtering, gas phase reaction method, vacuum deposition, etc., if desired. For example, a substrate in which a passivation film such as a silicon nitride film is formed on the surface of the TFT liquid crystal driving substrate can be used.
続いて、本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法では、基板上に前述のようにして形成された着色組成物からなる膜(着色組成物層)に対し、例えばフォトマスクを介して露光が行なわれる。露光に適用し得る光もしくは放射線としては、g線、h線、i線、j線、KrF光、ArF光が好ましく、特にi線が好ましい。照射光にi線を用いる場合、100mJ/cm2~10000mJ/cm2の露光量で照射することが好ましい。 << Exposure Step >>
Subsequently, in the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, the film (colored composition layer) made of the colored composition formed on the substrate as described above is exposed through, for example, a photomask. As light or radiation applicable to exposure, g-line, h-line, i-line, j-line, KrF light and ArF light are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable. When using the i-line to the irradiation light is preferably irradiated at an exposure dose of 100mJ / cm 2 ~ 10000mJ / cm 2.
レーザー光源を用いた露光方式では、光源として紫外光レーザーを用いることが好ましい。照射光は、波長が300nm~380nmの範囲である波長の範囲の紫外光レーザーが好ましく、300nm~360nmの範囲の波長である紫外光レーザーがより好ましい。具体的には、特に出力が大きく、比較的安価な固体レーザーのNd:YAG(イットリウム・アルミニウム・ガーネット)レーザーの第三高調波(355nm)や、エキシマレーザーのXeCl(308nm)、XeF(353nm)を好適に用いることができる。
被露光物(パターン)の露光量としては、1mJ/cm2~100mJ/cm2の範囲であり、1mJ/cm2~50mJ/cm2の範囲がより好ましい。露光量がこの範囲であると、パターン形成の生産性の点で好ましい。 Exposure Step Using Laser Light Source In an exposure method using a laser light source, it is preferable to use an ultraviolet laser as the light source. The irradiation light is preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 380 nm, and more preferably an ultraviolet laser having a wavelength in the range of 300 nm to 360 nm. Specifically, the third harmonic (355 nm) of an Nd: YAG (yttrium, aluminum, garnet) laser, which is a relatively inexpensive solid laser with a large output, and the XeCl (308 nm), XeF (353 nm) of an excimer laser. Can be suitably used.
The exposure amount of the object to be exposed (pattern) is in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably in the range of 1 mJ / cm 2 to 50 mJ / cm 2 . An exposure amount within this range is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern formation productivity.
液晶表示装置用のカラーフィルタを製造する際には、プロキシミテイ露光機、ミラープロジェクション露光機により、主として、h線、i線を使用した露光が好ましく用いられる。また、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを製造する際には、ステッパー露光機にて、主として、i線を使用することが好ましい。なお、TFT方式液晶駆動用基板を用いてカラーフィルタを製造する際には、用いられるフォトマスクは、画素(着色パターン)を形成するためのパターンの他、スルーホールなどの窪みを形成するためのパターンが設けられているものが使用される。 There are no particular restrictions on the exposure apparatus, but commercially available devices such as Callisto (buoy technology), EGIS (buoy technology), DF2200G (Dainippon Screen) can be used. It is. Further, devices other than those described above are also preferably used.
When manufacturing a color filter for a liquid crystal display device, exposure using mainly h-line and i-line is preferably used by a proximity exposure machine and a mirror projection exposure machine. Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, it is preferable to mainly use i-line in a stepper exposure machine. When manufacturing a color filter using a TFT type liquid crystal driving substrate, the photomask used is for forming a depression such as a through hole in addition to a pattern for forming a pixel (colored pattern). Those provided with a pattern are used.
また、露光は、着色組成物層中の色材の酸化褪色を抑制するために、チャンバー内に窒素ガスを流しながら行なうことができる。 The colored composition layer exposed as described above can be heated.
The exposure can be performed while flowing a nitrogen gas in the chamber in order to suppress oxidation fading of the coloring material in the colored composition layer.
続いて、露光後の着色組成物層に対して、現像液にて現像が行なわれる。これにより、ネガ型もしくはポジ型の着色パターン(レジストパターン)を形成することができる。現像工程では、露光後の塗布膜の未硬化部を現像液に溶出させ、硬化分のみを基板上に残存させる。
現像液は、未硬化部における着色組成物の塗布膜(着色組成物層)を溶解する一方、硬化部を溶解しないものであれば、いずれのものも用いることができる。例えば、種々の有機溶剤の組み合わせやアルカリ性水溶液を用いることができる。
現像に用いられる有機溶剤としては、本発明の着色組成物を調製する際に使用できる既述の溶剤が挙げられる。
アルカリ性水溶液としては、例えば、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウム、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5,4,0]-7-ウンデセン等のアルカリ性化合物を、濃度が0.001質量%~10質量%、好ましくは0.01質量%~1質量%となるように溶解したアルカリ性水溶液が挙げられる。現像液がアルカリ性水溶液である場合、アルカリ濃度は、好ましくはpH11~13、さらに好ましくはpH11.5~12.5となるように調製するのがよい。
アルカリ性水溶液には、例えば、メタノール、エタノール等の水溶性有機溶剤や界面活性剤等を適量添加することもできる。 << Step of forming colored pattern >>
Subsequently, development is performed with a developer on the colored composition layer after exposure. Thereby, a negative type or positive type coloring pattern (resist pattern) can be formed. In the development step, the uncured portion of the coating film after exposure is eluted in the developer, and only the cured portion remains on the substrate.
Any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the coating film (colored composition layer) of the colored composition in the uncured part, but does not dissolve the cured part. For example, combinations of various organic solvents and alkaline aqueous solutions can be used.
Examples of the organic solvent used for development include the above-described solvents that can be used when preparing the colored composition of the present invention.
Examples of the alkaline aqueous solution include tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate Sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0 ] The concentration of an alkaline compound such as -7-undecene is 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. And alkali aqueous solution was dissolved at a. When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, the alkali concentration is preferably adjusted to pH 11 to 13, more preferably pH 11.5 to 12.5.
An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol, a surfactant, or the like can be added to the alkaline aqueous solution.
現像は、デイップ方式、シャワー方式、スプレー方式などいずれでもよく、これにスウィング方式、スピン方式、超音波方式などを組み合わせてもよい。現像液に触れる前に、被現像面を予め水等で湿しておいて、現像ムラを防ぐこともできる。また、基板を傾斜させて現像することもできる。
また、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを製造する場合にはパドル現像も用いられる。 The development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is 20 seconds to 90 seconds.
Development may be any of a dip method, a shower method, a spray method, and the like, and may be combined with a swing method, a spin method, an ultrasonic method, or the like. It is also possible to prevent development unevenness by previously moistening the surface to be developed with water or the like before touching the developer. It is also possible to develop with the substrate tilted.
Further, when manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, paddle development is also used.
リンス処理は、通常は純水で行なうが、省液のために、最終洗浄で純水を用い、洗浄初期は使用済の純水を使用したり、また、基板を傾斜させて洗浄したり、超音波照射を併用したりする方法を用いてもよい。 After the development process, a rinsing process for washing and removing excess developer is performed, followed by drying, followed by heat treatment (post-baking) to complete the curing.
The rinse treatment is usually performed with pure water, but to save liquid, pure water is used in the final cleaning, and used pure water is used in the initial stage of cleaning, or the substrate is inclined and cleaned. You may use the method of using ultrasonic irradiation together.
加熱処理の際の温度としては、100℃~300℃であることが好ましく、さらに好ましくは、150℃~250℃である。また、加熱時間は、10分~120分程度が好ましい。 It is preferable to further heat-treat the colored pattern that has been post-exposed as described above. The colored pattern can be further cured by subjecting the formed colored pattern to heat treatment (so-called post-bake treatment). This heat treatment can be performed by, for example, a hot plate, various heaters, an oven, or the like.
The temperature during the heat treatment is preferably 100 ° C. to 300 ° C., more preferably 150 ° C. to 250 ° C. The heating time is preferably about 10 minutes to 120 minutes.
なお、単色の着色組成物層の形成、露光、現像が終了する毎に(1色毎に)、上記後露光および/またはポストベーク処理を行なってもよいし、所望の色数の全ての着色組成物層の形成、露光、現像が終了した後に、一括して上記後露光および/またはポストベーク処理を行なってもよい。 The colored pattern thus obtained constitutes a pixel in the color filter. In manufacturing a color filter having pixels of a plurality of hues, the above steps may be repeated according to a desired number of colors.
It should be noted that the post-exposure and / or post-bake treatment may be performed each time the formation, exposure, and development of a single-color coloring composition layer is completed (for each color), or all colors having a desired number of colors may be used. After the formation, exposure, and development of the composition layer are completed, the post-exposure and / or post-bake treatment may be performed collectively.
着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、露光および現像することによりフォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程と、レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして着色層をドライエッチングする工程とを含む製造方法が挙げられる。 Moreover, the coloring composition of this invention is applicable also to the manufacturing method of the color filter containing a dry etching process. As an example of such a production method, a step of forming a colored layer using the colored composition of the present invention,
Manufacturing comprising a step of forming a photoresist layer on a colored layer, a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask A method is mentioned.
本発明のカラーフィルタは、画像表示装置や固体撮像素子に用いることが可能であり、特に液晶表示装置の用途に好適である。液晶表示装置に用いた場合、良好な色相を達成しながら、分光特性およびコントラストに優れた画像の表示が可能になる。 The color filter obtained by the method for producing a color filter of the present invention (the color filter of the present invention) is excellent in hue and contrast because the colored composition of the present invention is used.
The color filter of the present invention can be used for an image display device or a solid-state image sensor, and is particularly suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device. When used in a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to display an image having excellent spectral characteristics and contrast while achieving a good hue.
基板上のブラックマトリックスは、カーボンブラック、チタンブラックなどの黒色顔料の加工顔料を含有する着色組成物を用い、塗布、露光、および現像の各工程を経て、その後、必要に応じて、ポストベークすることにより形成することができる。 As for the use of the coloring composition of the present invention, the description has mainly focused on the use for forming the color pattern of the color filter in the above, but it is also applicable to the formation of a black matrix for isolating the color pattern (pixel) constituting the color filter. can do.
For the black matrix on the substrate, a coloring composition containing a black pigment processed pigment such as carbon black or titanium black is used, followed by coating, exposure, and development, and then post-baking as necessary. Can be formed.
本発明の画像表示装置は、本発明のカラーフィルタを備えてなるものである。画像表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(有機EL)表示装置などが挙げられる。特に液晶表示装置の用途に好適である。本発明のカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置は、表示画像の色合いが良好で表示特性に優れた高画質画像を表示することができる。 <Image display device>
The image display device of the present invention comprises the color filter of the present invention. Examples of the image display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence (organic EL) display device. It is particularly suitable for liquid crystal display devices. The liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image with a good display image color and excellent display characteristics.
また、本発明のカラーフィルタは、明るく高精細なCOA(Color-filter On Array)方式にも供することが可能である。 The color filter of the present invention is particularly effective for a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type liquid crystal display device. The color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”. Further, the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching), a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment), a STN (Super-Twist Nematic). ), TN (Twisted Nematic), VA (Vertical Alignment), OCS (On-chip spacer), FFS (Fringe field switching), and R-OCB (Reflective Optical Compensated).
The color filter of the present invention can also be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明のカラーフィルタを備える。本発明の固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明のカラーフィルタを備え、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。 <Solid-state imaging device>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that includes the color filter of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device.
更に、上記デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(支持体に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。 On a support, transfer electrodes made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD (charge coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.) are provided. A nitride film formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving part. The device has a device protective film made of silicone or the like, and has the color filter for a solid-state imaging device of the present invention on the device protective film.
Further, a configuration having light collecting means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter) on the device protective film and below the color filter (on the side close to the support), or a structure having the light collecting means on the color filter. Etc.
サンプルから溶剤を除去し、得られた固形分をテトラヒドロフランにて0.1質量%に希釈し、HLC-8020GPC(東ソー(株)製)にて、TSKgel α―M(東ソー(株)製、7.8mm(内径)×30cm)を2本直列につないだものをカラムとして測定した。測定条件は、試料濃度を0.35質量%のN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)、流速を0.3mL/min、サンプル注入量を10μL、測定温度を40℃とし、紫外線検出器を用いて行った値である。
<トリアリールメタン構造を有する重量平均分子量1500以下の化合物(化合物A)の含有量>
GPC測定により得られたデータから、重量平均分子量1500以下の量を見積もって算出した。 <Method for measuring weight average molecular weight (Mw) (GPC measurement)>
The solvent was removed from the sample, and the obtained solid content was diluted to 0.1% by mass with tetrahydrofuran, and TSKgel α-M (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), 7 by HLC-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation). .8 mm (inner diameter) × 30 cm) connected in series was measured as a column. The measurement conditions were N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) with a sample concentration of 0.35 mass%, a flow rate of 0.3 mL / min, a sample injection volume of 10 μL, a measurement temperature of 40 ° C., and an ultraviolet detector. This is the value obtained.
<Content of Compound (Compound A) having Triarylmethane Structure and Weight Average Molecular Weight of 1500 or Less>
An amount having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less was estimated and calculated from data obtained by GPC measurement.
(TAM1の合成)
TAM1は以下のルートにしたがって合成した。
(Synthesis of TAM1)
TAM1 was synthesized according to the following route.
4、4’-ジクロロベンゾフェノン(化合物1)25.1gとキシレン200mLとナトリウム tert-ブトキシド28.8gと1,3,5-メシチルアミンを三口フラスコに仕込み、1時間窒素バブリングを行い、酢酸パラジウム(II)22.5mg、ジシクロヘキシル(1,1-ジフェニル-1-プロペン-2-イル)ホスフィン78.1mgを添加し110℃で3時間攪拌した。
室温まで冷却した後、イオン交換水200mLと2-プロパノール40mLの混合溶液を加え、濾過した後、トルエン160mLと2-プロパノール20mLの混合溶液、イオン交換水200mL、2-プロパノール200mLの順番で洗浄し化合物2を39.3g(収率87.6%)得た。 (Synthesis of Synthetic Intermediate (Compound 2))
4,3′-Dichlorobenzophenone (Compound 1) 25.1 g, xylene 200 mL, sodium tert-butoxide 28.8 g and 1,3,5-mesitylamine were charged into a three-necked flask and subjected to nitrogen bubbling for 1 hour, and palladium acetate (II ) 22.5 mg and dicyclohexyl (1,1-diphenyl-1-propen-2-yl) phosphine 78.1 mg were added and stirred at 110 ° C. for 3 hours.
After cooling to room temperature, a mixed solution of 200 mL of ion-exchanged water and 40 mL of 2-propanol was added, filtered, and then washed in the order of a mixed solution of 160 mL of toluene and 20 mL of 2-propanol, 200 mL of ion-exchanged water, and 200 mL of 2-propanol. 39.3g (yield 87.6%) of compound 2 was obtained.
三口フラスコに窒素フローし、N-メチルピロリドン150mLと水素化ナトリウム8.0gを仕込み、化合物2 30,0gをN-メチルピロリドン100mLに溶解した溶液を30分かけて滴下し、3時間攪拌した後、p-トルエンスルホン酸メチル27.4gを30分かけて滴下した。その後2時間攪拌し、イオン交換水220mLと2-プロパノール50mLの混合溶液をゆっくり滴下した後、1mol/L塩酸水70mLを滴下し、濾過した。イオン交換水200mL、メタノール200mL、ヘキサン160mLと2-プロパノール20mLの混合溶媒の順番で洗浄し、化合物3を31.6g(99.0%)得た。 (Synthesis of Synthetic Intermediate (Compound 3))
After flowing into a three-necked flask with nitrogen, 150 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone and 8.0 g of sodium hydride were charged, and a solution prepared by dissolving 30.0 g of Compound 2 in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was added dropwise over 30 minutes and stirred for 3 hours. Then, 27.4 g of methyl p-toluenesulfonate was added dropwise over 30 minutes. Thereafter, the mixture was stirred for 2 hours, and a mixed solution of 220 mL of ion exchange water and 50 mL of 2-propanol was slowly added dropwise, and then 70 mL of 1 mol / L hydrochloric acid solution was added dropwise and filtered. Washing was carried out in the order of 200 mL of ion-exchanged water, 200 mL of methanol, 160 mL of hexane and 20 mL of 2-propanol to obtain 31.6 g (99.0%) of Compound 3.
三口フラスコに、アセトニトリル110mLと1-ナフチルアミン(化合物4)24.5gと過塩素酸亜鉛六水和物3.2gを加えて40℃に昇温し、1,2-エポキシシクロヘキサン23.5gを30分かけて滴下した後、5時間攪拌した。アセトニトリル110mLを加え、イオン交換水170mLを滴下し、20分攪拌した後、室温まで冷却し、1時間攪拌した後に濾過した。イオン交換水50mLで2回洗浄し化合物5を32.3g(収率71.2%)得た。 (Synthesis of Synthetic Intermediate (Compound 5))
In a three-necked flask, 110 mL of acetonitrile, 24.5 g of 1-naphthylamine (compound 4) and 3.2 g of zinc perchlorate hexahydrate were added, the temperature was raised to 40 ° C., and 23.5 g of 1,2-epoxycyclohexane was added to 30 ml. After dropwise addition over a period of 5 minutes, the mixture was stirred for 5 hours. 110 mL of acetonitrile was added, 170 mL of ion exchange water was added dropwise, and the mixture was stirred for 20 minutes, then cooled to room temperature, stirred for 1 hour, and then filtered. The product was washed twice with 50 mL of ion-exchanged water to obtain 32.3 g (yield: 71.2%) of Compound 5.
三口フラスコに、アセトニトリル20mLと2-メタクリロイロキシエチルコハク酸4.8gと塩化パラトルエンスルホニル5.3gと化合物5 4.8gを仕込み、10℃以下に冷却しながら1-メチルイミダゾール4.6gを30分かけて滴下した後、5時間攪拌した。室温に昇温した後、トルエン30mLとイオン交換水30mLを加え分液した後、5%NaHCO3水溶液30mLで2回洗浄した後、減圧濃縮しオイル状化合物を得た。
三口フラスコに、得られたオイル状化合物8.9gとアセトニトリル20mLと化合物3 9.1gとオキシ塩化リン6.4gを仕込み、90℃で3時間攪拌し、室温に冷却した後、酢酸エチル110mLとイオン交換水60mLを加え分液した。5%NaHCO3水溶液で洗浄し、リチウムビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド7.3gを加え30分攪拌した後、イオン交換水60mLを加え分液し、5%NaHCO3水溶液で洗浄した。
減圧濃縮した後、シリカゲルカラムで精製し、化合物R-2を8.9g(収率98.0%)を得た。 (Synthesis of Synthesis Intermediate (R-2))
A three-necked flask was charged with 20 mL of acetonitrile, 4.8 g of 2-methacryloyloxyethyl succinic acid, 5.3 g of paratoluenesulfonyl chloride, and 4.8 g of compound 5, and 4.6 g of 1-methylimidazole was cooled to 10 ° C. or lower. After dropwise addition over 30 minutes, the mixture was stirred for 5 hours. After raising the temperature to room temperature, 30 mL of toluene and 30 mL of ion-exchanged water were added to separate the solution, washed twice with 30 mL of 5% NaHCO 3 aqueous solution, and then concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain an oily compound.
A three-necked flask was charged with 8.9 g of the obtained oily compound, 20 mL of acetonitrile, 9.1 g of compound 3, and 6.4 g of phosphorus oxychloride, stirred at 90 ° C. for 3 hours, cooled to room temperature, Ion exchange water 60mL was added and liquid-separated. After washing with 5% NaHCO 3 aqueous solution and adding 7.3 g of lithium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide and stirring for 30 minutes, 60 mL of ion-exchanged water was added for liquid separation, followed by washing with 5% NaHCO 3 aqueous solution.
After concentration under reduced pressure, the residue was purified by a silica gel column to obtain 8.9 g (yield 98.0%) of compound R-2.
三口フラスコに、プロピレングリコール-1-モノメチルエーテル-2-アセタート1.9g仕込み、窒素フローしながら60℃に加熱し、プロピレングリコール-1-モノメチルエーテル-2-アセタート4.5gとドデシルメルカプタン0.24gとR-2 5.0gとシクロヘキシルメタクリレート0.56gとグリシジルメタクリレート0.67gとメタクリル酸0.43gと2,2’-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)0.16g溶液を1時間かけて滴下し、1時間攪拌した後、2,2’-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)0.08g加え、5時間攪拌した。室温に冷却し、ヘキサン35mLを加え、1時間攪拌した後、濾過しTAM1を6.7g(収率96.6%)得た。 <Synthesis of TAM1 (polymerization process)>
A three-necked flask was charged with 1.9 g of propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate and heated to 60 ° C. while flowing nitrogen, and 4.5 g of propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate and 0.24 g of dodecyl mercaptan. And a solution of 5.0 g of R-2, 0.56 g of cyclohexyl methacrylate, 0.67 g of glycidyl methacrylate, 0.43 g of methacrylic acid and 0.16 g of 2,2′-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) over 1 hour. After dropwise addition and stirring for 1 hour, 0.08 g of 2,2′-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) was added and stirred for 5 hours. After cooling to room temperature, 35 mL of hexane was added, and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour, and then filtered to obtain 6.7 g (yield 96.6%) of TAM1.
重合工程のドデシルメルカプタンの量を変更した以外は、合成例1と同様に合成した。 <TAM2-6>
Synthesis was performed in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1 except that the amount of dodecyl mercaptan in the polymerization step was changed.
重合工程の各モノマーの量を変更した以外は、TAM3と同様に合成した。 <TAM7-15>
It synthesize | combined similarly to TAM3 except having changed the quantity of each monomer of a superposition | polymerization process.
重合工程の各モノマーを変更した以外は、TAM3と同様に合成した。 <TAM16-22>
Synthesize | combined similarly to TAM3 except having changed each monomer of the superposition | polymerization process.
化合物3をN,N,N’,N’-テトラエチルー4,4’-ジアミノベンゾフェノンに変更した以外は、TAM3と同様に合成した。 <TAM23>
This compound was synthesized in the same manner as TAM3 except that Compound 3 was changed to N, N, N ′, N′-tetraethyl-4,4′-diaminobenzophenone.
リチウムビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドをカリウムトリス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)メチドに変更した以外はTAM3と同様に合成した。 <TAM24>
Synthesis was performed in the same manner as TAM3 except that lithium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide was changed to potassium tris (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) methide.
リチウムビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミドをトリフルオロメタンスルホン酸リチウムに変更した以外はTAM3と同様に合成した。 <TAM25>
Synthesis was performed in the same manner as TAM3 except that lithium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide was changed to lithium trifluoromethanesulfonate.
ベーシックブルー7(東京化成社製)を用いた。 <R-1>
Basic blue 7 (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was used.
重合工程のドデシルメルカプタンの量を変更した以外は、合成例1と同様に合成した。 <R-3, 5>
Synthesis was performed in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1 except that the amount of dodecyl mercaptan in the polymerization step was changed.
重合工程の各モノマーの量を変更した以外は、合成例1と同様に合成した。 <R-4>
It synthesize | combined similarly to the synthesis example 1 except having changed the quantity of each monomer of a superposition | polymerization process.
<実施例1~25、比較例1~5>
(着色組成物の調製)
下記組成の原料を混合して、着色組成物を調製した。
-組成-
・着色剤・・・5.1質量部
・重合性化合物(T-1)・・・6.0質量部
・アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-2)・・・5.3質量部
・光重合開始剤(V-4)・・・0.3質量部
・硬化促進剤(V-5)・・・0.2質量部
・溶剤(X-1)・・・71質量部
・溶剤(X-3)・・・13質量部
・界面活性剤(Z-1)・・・0.01質量部 [Test Example 1]
<Examples 1 to 25, Comparative Examples 1 to 5>
(Preparation of coloring composition)
The coloring composition was prepared by mixing raw materials having the following composition.
-composition-
Colorant: 5.1 parts by weight Polymerizable compound (T-1): 6.0 parts by weight Alkali-soluble binder (U-2): 5.3 parts by weight Photoinitiator (V-4) ... 0.3 parts by mass, curing accelerator (V-5) ... 0.2 parts by mass, solvent (X-1) ... 71 parts by mass, solvent (X-3) ... 13 parts by mass / Surfactant (Z-1) ... 0.01 parts by mass
アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-2):メタクリル酸アリル/メタクリル酸(77/23「質量比」共重合体、重量平均分子量37,000、酸価137mgKOH/g)
光重合開始剤(V-4):IRGACURE OXE-02(BASFジャパン)
硬化促進剤(V-5):カレンズMTBD-1(昭和電工株式会社)
溶剤(X-1):プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
溶剤(X-3):(メチルエチルジグリコール(MEGD)日本乳化剤株式会社製)
界面活性剤(Z-1):下記混合物(Mw=14000)
Alkali-soluble binder (U-2): allyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid (77/23 “mass ratio” copolymer, weight average molecular weight 37,000, acid value 137 mg KOH / g)
Photopolymerization initiator (V-4): IRGACURE OXE-02 (BASF Japan)
Curing accelerator (V-5): Karenz MTBD-1 (Showa Denko KK)
Solvent (X-1): Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate Solvent (X-3): (Methyl ethyl diglycol (MEGD) manufactured by Nippon Emulsifier Co., Ltd.)
Surfactant (Z-1): The following mixture (Mw = 14000)
上記で得られた着色硬化性樹脂組成物を、100mm×100mmのガラス基板(1737、コーニング社製)上に、スピンコート法で塗布した後、室温で30分間乾燥させることにより揮発成分を揮発させて着色層を得た。この着色層にフォトマスクを介さない全面露光のi線(波長365nm)を照射し、潜像を形成させた。i線の光源には超高圧水銀ランプを用い、平行光としてから照射するようにした。このとき、照射光量を40mJ/cm2とした。次いで、この潜像が形成された着色層に対して、炭酸ナトリウム/炭酸水素ナトリウムの水溶液(濃度2.4%)を用いて26℃で45秒間現像し、次いで、流水で20秒間リンスした後、スプレーで乾燥した。乾燥後の膜をクリーンオーブンで230℃×20分焼成し、硬化膜を得た。
上記で得られた硬化膜について下記の評価を行なった。 <Production of cured film>
The colored curable resin composition obtained above was applied on a 100 mm × 100 mm glass substrate (1737, manufactured by Corning) by spin coating, and then dried at room temperature for 30 minutes to volatilize volatile components. To obtain a colored layer. This colored layer was irradiated with i-rays (wavelength 365 nm) exposed on the entire surface without using a photomask to form a latent image. An ultra-high pressure mercury lamp was used as the i-line light source, and it was irradiated as parallel light. At this time, the irradiation light quantity was 40 mJ / cm 2 . Next, the colored layer on which the latent image was formed was developed with an aqueous solution of sodium carbonate / sodium bicarbonate (concentration 2.4%) at 26 ° C. for 45 seconds, and then rinsed with running water for 20 seconds. , Dried with spray. The dried film was baked at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes in a clean oven to obtain a cured film.
The following evaluation was performed about the cured film obtained above.
上記で得られた硬化膜の透過スペクトルと、上記で得られた硬化膜を追加で230℃で80分焼成したときの透過スペクトルの色差ΔEabを算出した。ΔEab値の小さい方が耐熱性に優れることを示す。
ΔEabが2未満 ・・・6
ΔEabが2以上、3未満 ・・・5
ΔEabが3以上、4未満 ・・・4
ΔEabが4以上、5未満 ・・・3
ΔEabが5以上、10未満 ・・・2
ΔEabが10以上 ・・・1 <Heat resistance>
The color difference ΔEab between the transmission spectrum of the cured film obtained above and the transmission spectrum when the cured film obtained above was additionally baked at 230 ° C. for 80 minutes was calculated. A smaller ΔEab value indicates better heat resistance.
ΔEab is less than 2 ... 6
ΔEab is 2 or more and less than 3 ・ ・ ・ 5
ΔEab is 3 or more and less than 4 ・ ・ ・ 4
ΔEab is 4 or more and less than 5 ・ ・ ・ 3
ΔEab is 5 or more and less than 10 2
ΔEab is 10 or more ・ ・ ・ 1
上記で得られた硬化膜を、230℃で30分加熱したのち、25℃のプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)中に、10分間、浸漬し、浸漬前後での色度を測定し、色変化の指標ΔEabを算出した。ΔEab値はPGMEAに浸漬前後の硬化膜の透過スペクトルから算出した。なお、ΔEabの値が3以下の場合に、色相変化が少なく、優れた耐溶剤性を有するものとした。
ΔEabが1.5以上、2未満・・・5
ΔEabが2以上、3.5未満・・・4
ΔEabが3.5以上、4未満・・・3
ΔEabが4以上、5未満・・・2
ΔEabが5以上・・・1 <Solvent resistance (color difference)>
The cured film obtained above is heated at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then immersed in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) at 25 ° C. for 10 minutes, and the chromaticity before and after immersion is measured to change the color. The index ΔEab was calculated. The ΔEab value was calculated from the transmission spectrum of the cured film before and after being immersed in PGMEA. In addition, when the value of ΔEab was 3 or less, the hue change was small and the solvent resistance was excellent.
ΔEab is 1.5 or more and less than 2, 5
ΔEab is 2 or more and less than 3.5 4
ΔEab is 3.5 or more and less than 4, 3
ΔEab is 4 or more and less than 5, 2
ΔEab is 5 or more ・ ・ ・ 1
ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)電極つきのガラス基板(商品名:1737 コーニング社製)上に、着色組成物を乾燥後の膜厚2.0μmとなるように塗布し、100℃のオーブンで60秒乾燥(プリベーク)した。その後、マスクを介さずに100mJ/cm2の露光(照度は20mW/cm2)をし、アルカリ現像液(商品名:CDK-1、富士フィルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)の1%水溶液を用いて25℃で現像し、水洗、乾燥後の塗布膜を230℃のオーブンで20分間加熱処理(ポストベーク)し、硬化膜を形成した。次いで、この硬化膜を形成した基板とITO電極を所定形状に蒸着しただけの基板とを、5μmのガラスビーズを混合したシール剤で貼り合わせたのち、基板間にメルク製液晶MJ971189(商品名)を注入して、液晶セルを作製した。
次いで、液晶セルを60℃の恒温層に24時間入れた後、液晶セルの電圧保持率を、東陽テクニカ製液晶電圧保持率測定システムVHR-1A型(商品名)を用いて下記の測定条件により測定し、下記基準に示す点数により評価した。点数が高いほど電圧保持率は良好である。
測定条件
・電極間距離:5μm~15μm
・印加電圧パルス振幅:5V
・印加電圧パルス周波数:60Hz
・印加電圧パルス幅:16.67msec
*電圧保持率:16.7ミリ秒後の液晶セル電位差/0ミリ秒で印加した電圧の値
*判定法
90%以上:5
85%以上90%未満:4
80%以上85%未満:3
75%以上80%未満:2
75%未満:1 <Voltage holding ratio>
A colored composition is applied onto a glass substrate with ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) electrode (trade name: 1737 manufactured by Corning) to a thickness of 2.0 μm after drying, and dried in an oven at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds ( Pre-baked). Thereafter, exposure was performed at 100 mJ / cm 2 without using a mask (illuminance was 20 mW / cm 2 ), and a 1% aqueous solution of an alkali developer (trade name: CDK-1, manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) was used. The film was developed at 25 ° C., washed with water and dried, and then heat-treated (post-baked) in an oven at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to form a cured film. Next, the substrate on which this cured film is formed and the substrate on which the ITO electrode is simply deposited in a predetermined shape are bonded together with a sealant mixed with 5 μm glass beads, and then Merck liquid crystal MJ971118 (trade name) between the substrates. Was injected to prepare a liquid crystal cell.
Next, after putting the liquid crystal cell in a constant temperature layer at 60 ° C. for 24 hours, the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal cell was measured using the liquid crystal voltage holding ratio measuring system VHR-1A type (trade name) manufactured by Toyo Technica under the following measurement conditions. It measured and evaluated by the score shown to the following reference | standard. The higher the score, the better the voltage holding ratio.
Measurement conditions / Distance between electrodes: 5 μm to 15 μm
・ Applied voltage pulse amplitude: 5V
・ Applied voltage pulse frequency: 60 Hz
-Applied voltage pulse width: 16.67 msec
* Voltage holding ratio: liquid crystal cell potential difference after 16.7 milliseconds / value of voltage applied at 0 milliseconds * judgment method 90% or more: 5
85% or more and less than 90%: 4
80% or more and less than 85%: 3
75% or more and less than 80%: 2
Less than 75%: 1
一方、比較例は、耐熱性と耐溶剤性とを両立できなかった。 From the above results, the example was able to form a cured film excellent in heat resistance and solvent resistance. Furthermore, the cured film was excellent in voltage holding ratio.
On the other hand, the comparative example could not achieve both heat resistance and solvent resistance.
<実施例26~48>
(着色組成物の調製)
下記組成の原料を混合して、着色組成物を調製した。
-組成-
・着色剤・・・5.1質量部
・重合性化合物(T-1)・・・6.0質量部
・アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-2)・・・5.3質量部
・光重合開始剤(V-4)・・・0.3質量部
・硬化促進剤(V-5)・・・0.2質量部
・添加剤(W-1)・・・0.5質量部
・溶剤(X-1)・・・71質量部
・溶剤(X-3)・・・13質量部
・界面活性剤(Z-1)・・・0.01質量部 [Test Example 2]
<Examples 26 to 48>
(Preparation of coloring composition)
The coloring composition was prepared by mixing raw materials having the following composition.
-composition-
Colorant: 5.1 parts by weight Polymerizable compound (T-1): 6.0 parts by weight Alkali-soluble binder (U-2): 5.3 parts by weight Photoinitiator (V-4) ... 0.3 parts by mass / curing accelerator (V-5) ... 0.2 parts by mass / additive (W-1) ... 0.5 parts by mass / solvent (X -1) ... 71 parts by mass, solvent (X-3) ... 13 parts by mass, surfactant (Z-1) ... 0.01 parts by mass
重合性化合物(T-1)、アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-2)、光重合開始剤(V-4)、硬化促進剤(V-5)、溶剤(X-1)、溶剤(X-3)、界面活性剤(Z-1):上述した重合性化合物(T-1)、アルカリ可溶性バインダー(U-2)、光重合開始剤(V-4)、硬化促進剤(V-5)、溶剤(X-1)、溶剤(X-3)、界面活性剤(Z-1)
添加剤(W-1):カリウムビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド(三菱マテリアル社製) Colorant: Colorant described in the following table Polymerizable compound (T-1), alkali-soluble binder (U-2), photopolymerization initiator (V-4), curing accelerator (V-5), solvent (X -1), solvent (X-3), surfactant (Z-1): the above-described polymerizable compound (T-1), alkali-soluble binder (U-2), photopolymerization initiator (V-4), Curing accelerator (V-5), solvent (X-1), solvent (X-3), surfactant (Z-1)
Additive (W-1): Potassium bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide (Mitsubishi Materials Corporation)
Claims (24)
- 一般式(TP1)、および、一般式(TP2)から選ばれるトリアリールメタン構造を有する繰り返し単位Aを少なくとも1種、および、架橋性基を有する繰り返し単位Bを含むポリマーTPと、重合性化合物と、を含み、
前記ポリマーTPは、重量平均分子量が3000~500000であり、トリアリールメタン構造を有する重量平均分子量1500以下の化合物Aの含有量が、前記ポリマーTPの質量に対して20質量%以下である、着色組成物;
The polymer TP has a weight average molecular weight of 3000 to 500,000, and the content of the compound A having a triarylmethane structure and a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or less is 20% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer TP. Composition;
- 前記ポリマーTPは、前記化合物Aの含有量が、前記ポリマーTPの質量に対して10質量%以下である、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to claim 1, wherein the content of the compound A in the polymer TP is 10% by mass or less based on the mass of the polymer TP.
- 前記ポリマーTPの重量平均分子量が10000~50000である、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the polymer TP has a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 to 50,000.
- 前記繰り返し単位Bが有する架橋性基が、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、オキサゾリン基、-C-O-Rで表される基およびカーボネート基から選ばれる少なくとも1種である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;ただし、Rは水素原子または炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。 The crosslinkable group of the repeating unit B is at least one selected from a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an oxazoline group, a group represented by —C—O—R, and a carbonate group. The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- 前記Xが、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオン、ヨウ素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、過塩素酸アニオン、ボレートアニオン、PF6-およびSbF6-から選択される少なくとも1種のアニオン、ならびに、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、下記一般式(A1)で表される構造および下記一般式(A2)で表される構造から選択される少なくとも1種の構造を有する化合物から選択される、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
一般式(A1)
一般式(A2)
General formula (A1)
General formula (A2)
- 前記Xが、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンまたはスルホン酸アニオンを含む化合物である、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein X is a compound containing a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, or a sulfonate anion.
- 前記Xが、架橋性基を含む化合物である、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein X is a compound containing a crosslinkable group.
- 前記Xが、アニオン部位を有する繰り返し単位を含むポリマーである、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein X is a polymer containing a repeating unit having an anion moiety.
- 一般式(TP1)および(TP2)中、Rtp1~Rtp11、Rtp71およびRtp72の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で表される基で置換されている、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
一般式(P)
一般式(A1)
一般式(A2)
General formula (P)
General formula (A1)
General formula (A2)
- 前記繰り返し単位Aが有するトリアリールメタン構造が、下記一般式(TP3)で表される、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
- 前記繰り返し単位Aが下記一般式(TP3-1)で表される、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
- 前記繰り返し単位Aが、下記一般式(TP3-2)で表される、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
- 前記ポリマーTPは、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルおよび(メタ)アクリル酸アミドの少なくとも1種に由来する繰り返し単位を含む、請求項1~12のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the polymer TP includes a repeating unit derived from at least one of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, and (meth) acrylic acid amide. Composition.
- キサンテン化合物、ジピロメテン系金属錯体化合物、ジオキサジン化合物およびフタロシアニン化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1~13のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 13, comprising at least one selected from a xanthene compound, a dipyrromethene metal complex compound, a dioxazine compound and a phthalocyanine compound.
- 光重合開始剤を含む、請求項1~14のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 14, comprising a photopolymerization initiator.
- ビス(トリフルオロメタンスルホニル)イミド塩を含む、請求項1~15のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 15, comprising a bis (trifluoromethanesulfonyl) imide salt.
- カラーフィルタの着色層形成用である、請求項1~16のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 16, which is used for forming a colored layer of a color filter.
- 請求項1~17のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜。 A cured film obtained by curing the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 17.
- 請求項18に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。 A color filter having the cured film according to claim 18.
- 請求項1~17のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いて着色組成物層を形成する工程と、
前記着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、
前記着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程と、を含むカラーフィルタの製造方法。 Forming a colored composition layer using the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
Exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern;
And a step of developing and removing an unexposed portion of the colored composition layer to form a colored pattern. - 請求項1~17のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いて着色組成物層を形成し、硬化して着色層を形成する工程と、
前記着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、露光および現像することにより前記フォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程と、
前記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして前記着色層をドライエッチングする工程とを含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。 Forming a colored composition layer using the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 17 and curing to form a colored layer;
Forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer; patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern;
And a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask. - 請求項19に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to claim 19.
- 請求項19に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。 An image display device having the color filter according to claim 19.
- 下記一般式(TP-7)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリマーであり、前記ポリマーの重量平均分子量が3000~500000であり、トリアリールメタン構造を有する重量平均分子量1500以下の化合物Aの含有量が、前記ポリマーの質量に対して20質量%以下である、ポリマー;
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
KR1020177022893A KR101957754B1 (en) | 2015-02-27 | 2016-02-26 | COLORING COMPOSITION, CURED FILM, COLOR FILTER, METHOD FOR PRODUCING COLOR FILTER, SOLID-STATE PHOTOGRAPHIC DEVICE, IMAGE DISPLAY AND POLYMER |
JP2017502507A JP6461304B2 (en) | 2015-02-27 | 2016-02-26 | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2015039538 | 2015-02-27 | ||
JP2015-039538 | 2015-02-27 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2016136936A1 true WO2016136936A1 (en) | 2016-09-01 |
Family
ID=56789051
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2016/055788 WO2016136936A1 (en) | 2015-02-27 | 2016-02-26 | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method for color filter, solid state imaging element, image display device and polymer |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP6461304B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR101957754B1 (en) |
TW (1) | TWI739735B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2016136936A1 (en) |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2021517601A (en) * | 2018-09-04 | 2021-07-26 | エルジー・ケム・リミテッド | Colorant compositions, photosensitive materials, color filters and display devices |
JP2021517921A (en) * | 2018-09-06 | 2021-07-29 | エルジー・ケム・リミテッド | Compounds, colorant compositions, photosensitive materials, color filters and display devices |
KR20220020902A (en) | 2019-07-25 | 2022-02-21 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR102658207B1 (en) * | 2017-09-26 | 2024-04-19 | 도레이 카부시키가이샤 | Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, element having a cured film, organic EL display device having a cured film, method for producing a cured film, and method for producing an organic EL display device |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2013028764A (en) * | 2011-07-29 | 2013-02-07 | Fujifilm Corp | Colored curable composition, colored cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, method of producing color filter, solid-state image sensor, and image forming apparatus |
JP2013072030A (en) * | 2011-09-28 | 2013-04-22 | Fujifilm Corp | Coloring composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing the same, and solid state imaging device |
JP2013073104A (en) * | 2011-09-28 | 2013-04-22 | Fujifilm Corp | Color composition, color pattern, color filter, manufacturing method thereof, pattern formation method, solid state image sensor, and image display device |
JP2015143835A (en) * | 2013-12-25 | 2015-08-06 | Jsr株式会社 | Coloring composition, colored cured film and display element |
Family Cites Families (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2007086515A1 (en) | 2006-01-27 | 2007-08-02 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Gene expression analysis tool |
KR101466147B1 (en) | 2011-12-05 | 2014-11-27 | 제일모직 주식회사 | Photosensitive resin composition for color filter and color filter using the same |
JP5934664B2 (en) * | 2012-03-19 | 2016-06-15 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Colored radiation-sensitive composition, colored cured film, color filter, colored pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device |
CN104204105B (en) * | 2012-03-29 | 2016-12-07 | 三菱化学株式会社 | Triarylmethane compounds, colored resin composition, light filter, liquid crystal indicator and organic EL display |
-
2016
- 2016-02-26 WO PCT/JP2016/055788 patent/WO2016136936A1/en active Application Filing
- 2016-02-26 JP JP2017502507A patent/JP6461304B2/en active Active
- 2016-02-26 TW TW105105754A patent/TWI739735B/en active
- 2016-02-26 KR KR1020177022893A patent/KR101957754B1/en active IP Right Grant
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2013028764A (en) * | 2011-07-29 | 2013-02-07 | Fujifilm Corp | Colored curable composition, colored cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, method of producing color filter, solid-state image sensor, and image forming apparatus |
JP2013072030A (en) * | 2011-09-28 | 2013-04-22 | Fujifilm Corp | Coloring composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing the same, and solid state imaging device |
JP2013073104A (en) * | 2011-09-28 | 2013-04-22 | Fujifilm Corp | Color composition, color pattern, color filter, manufacturing method thereof, pattern formation method, solid state image sensor, and image display device |
JP2015143835A (en) * | 2013-12-25 | 2015-08-06 | Jsr株式会社 | Coloring composition, colored cured film and display element |
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2021517601A (en) * | 2018-09-04 | 2021-07-26 | エルジー・ケム・リミテッド | Colorant compositions, photosensitive materials, color filters and display devices |
JP7120526B2 (en) | 2018-09-04 | 2022-08-17 | エルジー・ケム・リミテッド | Colorant composition, photosensitive material, color filter and display device |
JP2021517921A (en) * | 2018-09-06 | 2021-07-29 | エルジー・ケム・リミテッド | Compounds, colorant compositions, photosensitive materials, color filters and display devices |
JP7120527B2 (en) | 2018-09-06 | 2022-08-17 | エルジー・ケム・リミテッド | compounds, colorant compositions, photosensitive materials, color filters and display devices |
KR20220020902A (en) | 2019-07-25 | 2022-02-21 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
KR20170107488A (en) | 2017-09-25 |
TWI739735B (en) | 2021-09-21 |
JP6461304B2 (en) | 2019-01-30 |
TW201634592A (en) | 2016-10-01 |
JPWO2016136936A1 (en) | 2018-02-01 |
KR101957754B1 (en) | 2019-03-14 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6086885B2 (en) | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device and compound | |
JP6129728B2 (en) | Colored curable composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and triarylmethane compound | |
TWI666514B (en) | Colored curable resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state image sensing device, image display device, compound and cation | |
JP6396166B2 (en) | Colored curable composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6166683B2 (en) | Colored curable composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6461304B2 (en) | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer | |
JP2017165808A (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state image sensor, image display device and compound | |
KR101855237B1 (en) | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device | |
WO2015115282A1 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, color filter, solid-state image pickup device, and image display device | |
JP6457413B2 (en) | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer | |
JP2016196614A (en) | Colored curable resin composition, cured film, color filter, color filter production method, solid-state image sensor and image display device | |
JP6473370B2 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, colorant, and method for producing colorant | |
JP2015069052A (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method of color filter, solid state imaging element, and liquid crystal display device | |
TWI746456B (en) | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer | |
WO2015093501A1 (en) | Colored composition, manufacturing method for colored composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method for color filter, solid state imaging element, and image display device | |
JP6511326B2 (en) | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method of manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device | |
JP2017171784A (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid state image sensor, image display device and compound |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 16755680 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20177022893 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2017502507 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 16755680 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |